2013 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×
 

2013 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual

on

  • 3,786 views

2013 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

2013 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

Statistics

Views

Total Views
3,786
Views on SlideShare
3,786
Embed Views
0

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
2
Comments
0

0 Embeds 0

No embeds

Accessibility

Categories

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

    2013 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual 2013 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual Presentation Transcript

    • COVER IN 2013 2013 OWNER’S MANUALChrysler Group LLC13PFD41-126-AB Second Edition Printed in U.S.A. 1107401cv1 13PFD41-126-AB Chrysler 1" gutter 04/13/2012 08:49:02 2013 2013 OWNER’S MANUALChrysler Group LLC13PFD41-126-AB Second Edition Printed in U.S.A. COVER IN
    • VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation ofChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optionalname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available orDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard anyDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that areaccidents. not on this vehicle.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes indrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking design and specifications, and/or make additions to ordriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC drinking. Never drink and then drive.
    • SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 910 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 10
    • INTRODUCTION 1CONTENTSⅥ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Number ............. 6Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ........... 7Ⅵ Warnings And Cautions .................. 6
    • 4 INTRODUCTIONINTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorizedCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares aboutworkmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all your satisfaction.essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUALThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which sectiontance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on thecustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andread these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of theshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughouting and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
    • INTRODUCTION 5 1
    • 6 INTRODUCTIONWARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in a collision orbodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If youdo not read this entire manual, you may miss importantinformation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on theleft front corner of the instrument panel, visible throughthe windshield. This number also is stamped into theright front body, on the right front seat crossmember VIN Locationunder the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
    • INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! 1 Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Right Front Body VIN LocationNOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 2Ⅵ A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ⅵ Sentry Key௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Ⅵ Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 20 ▫ Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ▫ Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . 17 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Ⅵ Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
    • 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEⅥ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Ⅵ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Ⅵ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26 Ⅵ Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 26 Ⅵ Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Ⅵ Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27 Ⅵ Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Ⅵ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 54 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 55 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Ⅵ Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 92 2▫ Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Ⅵ Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 (BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 58 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 64
    • 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEA WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or N-Go, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system will display the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Centerin it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instru-transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The ment Panel” for further information.keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob withRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a KeylessIgnition Node (KIN).Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If EquippedThe Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to anignition switch. It has four operating positions, three withdetents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START positionis a spring-loaded momentary contact position. Whenreleased from the START position, the switch automati-cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger 2 compartment. The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate. NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with1 — OFF the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back3 — ON/RUN4 — START up method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
    • 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEPut the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Featurethe Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button If your vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-and push to operate the ignition switch. Go™ feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch or lock cylinders with either side up. Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)1 — OFF2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON/RUN
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key Fob — If Equipped The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. 2 The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.Standard Blade Ignition Key
    • 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latchon the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb andthen pull the key out with your other hand. Emergency Key Removal (KIN) NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up. Emergency Key Removal (WIN)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17Ignition Or Accessory On Message WARNING!Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC orON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the keyyou to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. 2the ignition or accessory on message will display in the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withcluster. access to an unlocked vehicle.NOTE: With the Uconnect௡ system, the power window • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended isswitches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power dangerous for a number of reasons. A child oroutlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either dren should be warned not to touch the parkingfront door will cancel this feature. The time for this brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, andin “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keylessinformation. Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other con- trols, or move the vehicle. (Continued)
    • 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The system uses a Key or Key Fob with Remote Keyless WARNING! (Continued) Entry (RKE) transmitter, an RF receiver, and either an • Do not leave children or animals inside parked Ignition Node Module (IGNM) or a Keyless Ignition vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may Node (KIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. cause serious injury or death. Therefore, only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. CAUTION! After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a remove the Key or Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In vehicle unattended. addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in theSENTRY KEYா engine being shut off after two seconds.The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. Thesystem does not need to be armed or activated. Operationis automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is lockedor unlocked.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal the vehicle. Once a Key or Key Fob is programmed to avehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec- vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as CAUTION! 2possible by an authorized dealer. Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all CAUTION! doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system is not compat- At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided ible with some after-market remote starting systems. with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is problems and loss of security protection. required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming abeen programmed to the vehicle electronics. blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.Replacement Keys NOTE: When having the Sentry Key௡ ImmobilizerNOTE: Only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you tothe vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate an authorized dealer.
    • 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECustomer Key Programming Security Alarm will provide the following audible andProgramming Keys or Key Fobs with RKE transmitters visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, parkmay be performed at an authorized dealer. lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.General InformationThe Sentry Key௡ system complies with FCC rules Part 15 Rearming Of The Systemand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken tosubject to the following conditions: disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off• This device may not cause harmful interference. after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will• This device must accept any interference that may be rearm itself. received, including interference that may cause unde- To Arm The System sired operation. Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED Remove the key from the ignition switch and either pressThe Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passengerfor unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau- door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remotethorized operation. This system may also incorporate a Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door isultrasonic intrusion sensor that monitors for motion in closed, or if all doors are closed, the Vehicle Securitythe vehicle. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not To Disarm The Systemilluminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™addition, if you open a door during the arming period, Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitterthe Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro- 2 or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch andcess. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after turn the key to the ON/RUN position.closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously-described arming sequences. NOTE: • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button onVehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the VehiclePress the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button until Security Alarm.the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indi-cates that the vehicle ignition is ЉOFFЉ (refer to “Starting • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed duringProcedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will notinformation). Then either press the power door LOCK disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone entersswitch while the driver or passenger door is open, press the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, thethe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK but- alarm will sound.ton or press the Passive Entry Door Handle LOCK button • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior(refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information).
    • 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEVehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™ If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the batteryEither press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm willor grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If thisStarting Your Vehicle” for further information), press the occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.Keyless Enter-N-Go™Start/Stop button (requires at least Tamper Alertone valid Key Fob in the vehicle), or insert a valid Key If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm inFob into the ignition switch (if the Start/Stop button is your absence, the horn will sound three times when youremoved) and rotate it to the ON/RUN position. disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle forThe Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your tampering.vehicle; however, you can create conditions where theVehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one ILLUMINATED ENTRYof the previously-described arming sequences has oc- The courtesy lights will turn on when you use thecurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock thewhether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the doors or open any door.vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this This feature also turns on the approach lighting in theoccurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- ther information.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and aboveor they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position. ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.NOTE: 2• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the ЉDome ONЉ position (extreme top position).• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob With RKE TransmitterKey Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter doesnot need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate thesystem.
    • 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Under- standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Flash Lights With Lock Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob With RKE Transmitter This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash whenTo Unlock The Doors the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To changetransmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice the current setting, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” inwithin five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherlights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The information.illuminated entry system will also turn on.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Yourwhen the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel” for further information.The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles 2 To Unlatch The Trunkequipped through Uconnect௡. To change the current Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter twosetting, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer toTo Lock The Doors “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know BeforePress and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash andthe horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and holdIf the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, theStarting Your Vehicle” for further information. headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, theSound Horn With Remote Key Lock horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights willThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors turn on.are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
    • 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless Transmitter Battery Replacementyou turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.(24 km/h) or greater. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorateNOTE: 1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the and horn will remain on. elastomer seal during removal.• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. by the system. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. SkinProgramming Additional Transmitters oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch aProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.performed at an authorized dealer.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 273. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normalhalves of the case together. Make sure there is an even distance, check for these two conditions:“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expectedtighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter 2 life of the battery is a minimum of three years.operation. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio stationGeneral Information tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDfollowing conditions: This system uses the Key Fob with Remote• This device may not cause harmful interference. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle• This device must accept any interference received, while still maintaining security. The system has including interference that may cause undesired a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). operation. NOTE:NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- • The vehicle must be equipped with an automaticproved by the party responsible for compliance could transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range.
    • 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEHow To Use Remote Start WARNING!All of the following conditions must be met before theengine will remote start: • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-• Shift lever in PARK oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-• Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.• Hood closed • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters• Trunk closed away from children. Operation of the Remote Start• HAZARD switch off System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)• Battery at an acceptable charge level Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped• RKE PANIC button not pressed. The following messages will display in the EVIC if the• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:• Vehicle theft alarm not active • Remote Start Aborted — Door Open• Ignition in OFF position • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open NOTE: • If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset 2 • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold Remote Start mode.• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired • For security, power window and power sunroof op- eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle isThe EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled in the Remote Start mode.to the ON/RUN position. • The engine can be started two consecutive times (twoTo Enter Remote Start Mode 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, Press and release the REMOTE START button the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving Theprogrammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle Vehiclewill remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute Press and release the REMOTE START button one time orcycle. allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
    • 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system NOTE: The message ЉRemote Start Active Push Startwill disable the one time press of the REMOTE START ButtonЉ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™)button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote or ЉRemote Start Active Key to RunЉ (vehicles notStart request. equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) will display in the EVIC until you push the START button or turn the key toTo Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle the RUN position.Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the DOOR LOCKSdoors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (ifequipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, Manual Door Lockspress and release the START/STOP button (vehicles To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each doorequipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) or insert the key trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull theand turn it to the RUN position (vehicles not equipped inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the doorwith Keyless Enter-N-Go™). lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as 2 well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- Door Lock Knob dren should be warned not to touch the parkingIf the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible) brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle,make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACCclosing the door. or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
    • 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEPower Door Locks The doors can also be locked and unlocked with theA power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. For furtherpanel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped Power Door Lock Switch The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programmingyour authorized dealer per written request of the cus- To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™tomer. Please see your authorized dealer for service. Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 2Automatic Unlock Doors On ExitThe doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit featurepower door locks if: in accordance with local laws.1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rearabled. Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped withreturned to 0 mph (0 km/h). Child-Protection Door Lock system.3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK. To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection4. Any door is opened. Door Lock System5. The doors were not previously unlocked. 1. Open the rear door.6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a small coin into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
    • 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door. WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked). NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually rotate the door lock button to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle. Child-Protection Door Lock Function KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35NOTE:• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- ment Panel” for further information. 2• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re- sponse time.• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm. Grabbing The Driver’s Door HandleTo Unlock From The Driver’s Side: NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmedWith a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driverdoor handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer toThe interior door panel lock knob will raise when the “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-door is unlocked. ment Panel” for further information.
    • 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Unlock From The Passenger Side: If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panelWith a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front have been closed the vehicle checks the inside andpassenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKEcally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKEthe door is unlocked. transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automaticallydoor handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three timesunlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the PassivePress” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when theTransmitter In Vehicle doors are locked using the door panel switch, a validTo minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside thePassive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter isPassive Entry system is equipped with an automatic doorunlock feature which will function if the ignition switchis in the OFF position.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlockthe doors when any of the following conditions are true:• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter. 2• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the Passive Entry door handles.• The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle. Trunk Passive Entry Button• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive door panel switch and then close the doors. Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close theTo Enter The Trunk deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unlessWith a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of theof CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is deck lid.located on the deck lid.
    • 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Lock The Vehicle’s DoorsWith one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitterswithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front doorhandles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock allfour doors.Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the doorhandle lock button. This could unlock the door(s). Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE 2 transmitter battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. Do NOT Grab The handle When LockingNOTE:• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
    • 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.Power Windows The window controls will operate only when the ignitionThe window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.door windows. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect௡, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- formation. Power Window Switches
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Front Windows Express Up And Down — If WARNING! Equipped Do not let children play with the sunroof, and never Express Down leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob. Occu- 2 Press the switch for less than a half a second and release. pants, particularly unattended children, can become The window will go down automatically. entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may re- Manual Down sult in serious injury or death. Press the switch for more than a half a second and release when you want the window to stop.Driver One Touch Down Express UpThe driver door power window switch has an auto down Lift the switch for less than a half a second and release.feature. Press the window switch to the second detent The window will go up automatically.and release, and the window will go down automatically. Manual UpTo open the window part way, press the window switch Lift the switch for more than a half a second and releaseto the first detent and release it when you want the when you want the window to stop.window to stop.To stop the window from going alll the way down duringthe Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
    • 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Reset Auto Up• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window closure, it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up: down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window switch again to close the window. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger additional two seconds after the window is closed. the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the detent to open the window completely and continue to first detent and hold to close the window manually. hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. WARNING! Window Lockout Switch There is no anti-pinch protection when the window The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the panel allows you to disable the window controls on the window before closing. rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press and release the window lockout button (setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, press and release the window lockout button again (setting it in the UP position).
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the 2 buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the Window Lockout Switch button will operate.Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the perception ofpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with thewindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
    • 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The trunk lid can be released from Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know outside the vehicle by pressing the Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on TRUNK button on the Remote trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by TRUNK SAFETY WARNING using the external release switch located on the underside of the WARNING! decklid overhang. The release fea- Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, Trunk Release ture will function only when the either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or Button vehicle is in the unlock condition. through the inside of the vehicle. Always close theWith the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once inOpen symbol will display in the instrument cluster the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display even if they entered through the rear seat. If trappedwill reappear once the trunk is closed. in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Opensymbol will display until the trunk is closed.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45Trunk Emergency ReleaseAs a security measure, a trunk internal emergency releaselever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In theevent of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the 2trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha-nism. Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers
    • 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system• Supplemental Knee Air Bags properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains possible. (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized window seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for wheel CHildren (LATCH).• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different enhance occupant protection by managing occupant rates of inflation based on several factors, including the energy during an impact event severity and type of collision.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing childrisk of harm from a deploying air bag: seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride (Refer to “Child Restraints”) 2buckled up in a rear seat. You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING! child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced shoulder belts properly. Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause severe 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be injury or death to infants in that position. moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate.Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat beltproperly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured 4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehiclein the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtainsseats. Older children who do not use child restraints or (SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bagsbelt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled (SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC andup in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the spaceshoulder belt behind them or under their arm. between you and the door.
    • 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be WARNING! (Continued)modified to accommodate a disabled person, contactthe Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrumentunder ؆If You Need Assistance؆. panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air WARNING! Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more instrument panel. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or Always wear your seat belts even though you have window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. air bags. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer (Continued) much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt willon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of theand cause a collision that includes you. This can happen vehicle or being thrown out.far away from home or on your own street. 2 WARNING!Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and theycan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourof the worst injuries happen when people are thrown vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatfrom the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of belts.ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andinside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should using a seat belt properly.be belted at all times. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. SeatLap/Shoulder Belts belts are designed to go around the large bones ofAll seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with your body. These are the strongest parts of yourlap/shoulder belts. body and can take the forces of a collision best. (Continued)The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock duringvery sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows theshoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
    • 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas- sengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the beltadjust the front seat. go around your lap.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 513. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch WARNING!plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could 2 ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. (Continued) Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
    • 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too WARNING! (Continued) tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the collision. vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your Removing Slack From Beltabdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. WARNING! The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t allow the belt to retract fully. 2 be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING! possible and keep it snug. A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies immediately and have it fixed. must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it iscomfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractorwill withdraw any slack in the belt.
    • 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAdjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average you willIn the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than averagecan be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt you will prefer a higher position. When you release theaway from your neck. Push and fully depress the button anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure thatabove the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it it is locked in position.up or down to the position that fits you best. In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 553. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. If the passenger seating position is equipped with anThe folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the ALR and is being used for normal usage:latch plate. Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not 2folded webbing. activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear aSeat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbingThe seat belts in the passenger seating positions are to retract completely in this case and then carefully pullequipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-which are used to secure a child restraint system. For ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide theadditional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Љclick.Љstraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — IfRestraints” section. The chart below defines the type of Equippedfeature for each seating position. In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre- Driver Center Passenger locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in First Row N/A N/A ALR the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- Second Row ALR ALR ALR able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-• N/A — Not Applicable tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
    • 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEposition that has a belt with this feature. Children WARNING!12 years old and under should always be properlyrestrained in the rear seat. • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. tion is not working properly when checked ac- cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward untilthe entire belt is extracted. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you willhear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Energy Management Featurenow in the Automatic Locking Mode. This vehicle has a safety belt system with an EnergyHow To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Management feature in the front seating positions to helpUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-onto retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assemblyMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) that is designed to release webbing in a controlledlocking mode. manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57Seat Belt Pretensioner Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder SystemThe seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlertா)equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert௡ is a feature intended to remind the driver andremove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passenger 2These devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert௡) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is activebelt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seatearly in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light willpants, including those in child restraints. turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened.NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seatbelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The BeltAlert௡ warning sequence begins after the vehicleworn snugly and positioned properly. speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entirestraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Remindera deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
    • 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEunbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women(8 km/h), BeltAlert௡ will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsnotification. throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.The front passenger seat BeltAlert௡ is not active when thefront passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert௡ may be Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belttriggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across theequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will takethe rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is a collision.secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. Seat Belt ExtenderBeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your authorized If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended anddealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if sotivating BeltAlert௡. equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. ThisNOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, the extender should be used only if the existing belt is notSeat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with tender and store it.BeltAlert௡) seat belt remains unfastened.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat 2 belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air BagsThis vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both thedriver and front passenger as a supplement to the seatbelt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front AirBag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locationspassenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 2 — Supplemental Driver Andinstrument panel, above the glove compartment. The vanced Front Air Bags Passenger Side Knee Air Bagswords SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front AirIn addition, the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.Knee Air Bags mounted in the instrument panel belowthe steering column and below the glove compartment.
    • 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bagdesign. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,inflation based on several factors, including the severity and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABICand type of collision. air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or frontpassenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhancedseat position. protection for an occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are located inThis vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front the outboard side of the front seats and the rear seats (ifpassenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether equipped).the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. Theseat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the NOTE:Advanced Front Air Bags. • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.This vehicle may be equipped with a front passengeroccupant classification system (OCS) that may adjust the • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to aninflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon authorized dealer immediately.occupant weight.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61Air Bag System Components • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable CurtainsYour vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag (SABIC)system components: • Front and Side Impact Sensors• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) 2 • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,• Air Bag Warning Light and Seat Track Position Sensors• Steering Wheel and Column • Occupant Classification System (OCS)• Instrument Panel Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides• Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),• Knee Impact Bolster which may receive information from several air bag• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag system components, including the front impact sensors.• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.
    • 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may pro-• No objects should be placed over or near the air vide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during bag on the instrument panel, because any such a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a into the outboard side of the front and rear seats. collision severe enough to cause the air bag to When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the inflate. front and side of the seat’s back trim cover (front seats) or• Do not put anything on or around the air bag between the top and side seat’s cushion trim cover (rear covers or attempt to open them manually. You may seat). Each air bag deploys independently; a left side damage the air bags and you could be injured impact deploys the left air bags only and a right-side because the air bags may no longer be functional. impact deploys the right air bags only. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain inflating. (SABIC)• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front any way. and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster provided by the body structure. Each air bag features such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side- Occupants, including children who are up against or veryimpact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, close to SABIC or SAB air bags can be seriously injured orcovering both windows on the impact side. killed.NOTE: Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or 2• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the but they will open during air bag deployment. SABIC or SAB air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.• Being too close to the side air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use theThe system includes side impact sensors that are cali- appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint orbrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that booster seat recommended for the size and weight of therequire air bag occupant protection. child.SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their bodyrestraint system. outside of the window.
    • 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee WARNING! Air Bags • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain protection and work together with the Advanced Front (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up Air Bags during a frontal impact. high enough to block the location of the SABIC. Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front The area where the SABIC is located should re- Air Bags work with the Supplemental Knee Air Bags to main free from any obstructions. provide improved protection for the driver and front • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to between you and the side air bags; the perfor- improve occupant protection. mance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)Knee Impact Bolster The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety systemThe Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the required for this vehicle.front passenger, and position the front occupant for thebest interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag. The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicleORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air front-end damage but that produce a severe initial decel-bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, eration.Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag, and front The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. 2seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on several Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity andfactors, including the severity and type of impact. type of collision.Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decelerationFront Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves areadditional protection by supplementing the seat belts in not good indicators of whether or not an air bag shouldcertain frontal collisions depending on several factors, have deployed.including the severity and type of collision. AdvancedFront Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.he Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver andFront Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts ofcollisions, including some that may produce substantial the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START orvehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position orunderrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the airdepending on the type and location of impact, Advanced bags will not inflate.
    • 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe ORC contains a backup power supply system that WARNING!may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power orit becomes disconnected prior to deployment. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come Light in the instrument panel for approxi- on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned mately four to eight seconds for a self-check on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes when the ignition is first turned on. After the on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service theself-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the air bag system immediately.ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, itturns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Frontor continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Passenger Seatcomes on again after initial startup. The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system forIt also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- this vehicle.ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of thenoted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- following:tics also record the nature of the malfunction. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located in the front passenger seat
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67• OCS Sensor located in the front passenger seat Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air• Air Bag Warning Light Occupant Status Bag Classification Rearward-facing infant seat* Reduced-powerThe OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the passenger deployment 2Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the Child, including a child in a Full-power deploymentinflation rate of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if forward-facing child OR reduced-powerthe sensors estimate that: restraint or booster seat* deployment• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very Properly seated adult Full-power deployment light objects in it; or OR reduced-power deployment• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas- Unoccupied seat Reduced-power senger, including a child; or deployment• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward * It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, facing infant seat; or allowing a full-power front passenger air bag deploy- ment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her seat and never install a child restraint system, including weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time. a rearward-facing infant seat, in the front passenger seat.
    • 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the WARNING! passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an be modified. air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child important for the front passenger to be seated properly 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated ward facing infant seat. passengers are: • Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child • Sitting upright restraint. • Facing forwardThe OCM works with the OCS sensor to determine the • Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-front passenger seat occupant’s most probable classifica- ably on or near the floortion. The OCS sensor estimates the weight on the front • Sitting with their back against the seat back and thepassenger seat and where that weight is located. The seat back in an upright positionOCM communicates the classification status to the ORC.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING! Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp- erly may cause the OCS to not classify the passen- 2 ger’s weight accurately. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seat back in an upright position, your back against the seat back, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor. Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding anSeated Properly object may cause the OCS to not classify the passen- ger’s weight accurately, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
    • 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if:• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru- ment panel)• The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns around• The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright position• The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.) Not Seated Properly
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 2Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
    • 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional informa- WARNING! tion). Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™ Placing an object on the floor under the front pas- Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the senger seat may prevent the OCS from working latch before closing the seat. In addition, after closing the 2 properly, which may result in serious injury or death Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully under the front passenger. latched to the base. Over-stuffing the storage bin may result in misclassification of the front passenger’s weight.The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on whenever The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo-the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat nents that may affect front passenger Advanced Air Bagstatus. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a frontof the air bag system. seat passenger, the OCS components must function asIf the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or designed. Do not make any modifications to the frontstays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seatdrive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service forimmediately. any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories mayThe front passenger seat is equipped with Flip ’n Stow™ be used.Front Passenger Seat Storage (refer to “Understanding
    • 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The following requirements must be strictly followed: WARNING! • Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly orMake sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™ components in any way.Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interferewith the latch before closing the seat. In addition, • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers orafter closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin, cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for themake sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seatdownward and fully latched to the base. Over- cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.stuffing the storage bin, or a not fully latched pas- • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with ansenger seat cushion, may result in misclassification aftermarket seat cover or cushion.of the front passenger’s weight. This may result inserious injury or death in a collision. • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. • At no time should any supplemental restraint system (SRS) component or SRS related component or fas- tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- WARNING! vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large Unapproved modifications or service procedures to quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the the passenger seat assembly, its related components, Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates 2 seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the are possible, based on several factors, including the airbag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim could result in death or serious injury to the front cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to modified vehicle may not comply with required their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while (CMVSS). helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through theDriver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag vent holes of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do notInflator Units interfere with your control of the vehicle.The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air BagInflator Units are located in the center of the steeringwheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
    • 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESupplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee based on several factors, including the severity and typeAir Bag Inflator Units of collision, the side air bag inflators on the crash side ofThe Supplemental Knee Air Bag units are located in the the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity ofinstrument panel trim beneath the steering column and non-toxic gas. The inflating SABs exit through the seatbelow the glove compartment. When the ORC detects a seam into the space between the occupant and the door.collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units. The SABs fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The sideA large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a highthe Supplemental Knee Air Bags. The Supplemental Knee force that it could injure you if you are not seatedAir Bag deploys down and around the knee blocker/ properly, or if items are positioned in the area where theglove box surface allowing the air bags to inflate to the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 15 to20 milliseconds. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator UnitsSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) During collisions where the impact is confined to aInflator Units particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC mayThe Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on several factors,designed to activate only in certain side collisions. including the severity and type of collision. In theseThe ORC determines if a side collision requires the side events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on theair bags to inflate, based on several factors, including the impact side of the vehicle.severity and type of collision.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side Front And Side Impact Sensorscurtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid thethe outside edge of the headliner out of the way and ORC in determining appropriate response to impactcovers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 mil- events. 2liseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to Enhanced Accident Response Systemblink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, ifare not belted and seated properly, or if items are the communication network remains intact, and thepositioned in the area where the side curtain air bag power remains intact, depending on the nature of theinflates. This especially applies to children. The side event the ORC will determine whether to have thecurtain air bag is only about 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-when it is inflated. ing functions:Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Cut off fuel to the engine.vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators ofwhether or not an air bag should have deployed. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.
    • 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any the battery has power, until the ignition key is re- or all of the following may occur: moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause the Keyless Go Start/Stop button. abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and• Unlock the doors automatically. front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or thoseIn order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasiumfunctions after an event, the ignition switch must be floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.If A Deployment Occurs However, if you haven’t healed significantly within aThe Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctorimmediately after deployment. immediately.NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-likecollisions. This does not mean something is wrong with particles. The particles are a normal by-product of thethe air bag system. process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation Maintaining Your Air Bag System continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in- WARNING! structions for cleaning. 2 • Modifications to any part of the air bag systemDo not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- could cause it to fail when you need it. You couldployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air be injured if the air bag system is not there tobags will not be in place to protect you. protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or WARNING! stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac- • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im- bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con- works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. troller (ORC) system serviced as well. (Continued)
    • 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag Warning Light WARNING! (Continued) You will want to have the air bags ready to• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag inflate for your protection in a collision. The system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal may not function properly if modifications are circuits and interconnecting wiring associated made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer with air bag system electrical components. While the air for any air bag system service. If your seat includ- bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service serviced in any way (including removal or the air bag system immediately. loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during manufacturer approved seat accessories may be the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system first cycled to the ON/RUN position. for persons with disabilities, contact your autho- • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to rized dealer. eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing therelated gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags maynot be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check • How fast the vehicle was traveling.the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on 2 These data can help provide a better understanding ofthe inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if aEvent Data Recorder (EDR) non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded byThis vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type ofhow a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to personally identifying data routinely acquired during arecord data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems crash investigation.for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
    • 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Occupants, especially children, should not lean on orrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. sleep against the door, side windows, or area where theIn addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, SABIC or SAB air bags inflate, even if they are in ansuch as law enforcement, that have the special equip- infant or child restraint.ment, can read the information if they have access to thevehicle or the EDR. WARNING!Child Restraints In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The forcetime, including babies and children. Every state in the required to hold even an infant on your lap couldUnited States and all Canadian provinces require that become so great that you could not hold the child, nosmall children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the matter how strong you are. The child and others couldlaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.Children 12 years or younger should ride properlybuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash There are different sizes and types of restraints for childrenstatistics, children are safer when properly restrained in from newborn size to the child almost large enough for anthe rear seats rather than in the front. adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83Infants And Child Restraints held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or theSafety experts recommend that children ride rearward- LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lowerfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear 2facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can WARNING!be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible Rearward-facing child seats must never be used inchild seats. the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airThe infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the bag. An air bag deployment could cause severevehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until injury or death to infants in this position.they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.Convertible child seats can be used either rearward- Older Children And Child Restraintsfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child Children who are two years old or who have outgrownseats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward- their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats andused rearward-facing by children who have outgrown convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years tion are for children who are over two years old or whoold. Children should remain rearward-facing until they have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit ofreach the highest weight or height allowed by their their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children shouldconvertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
    • 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEas long as possible, up to the highest weight or height Children Too Large For Booster Seatsallowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder beltin the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bendchild restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower An- over the front of the seat when their back is against thechors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.All children whose weight or height is above the • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snugbelt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts as possible.fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent overthe vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming orthe seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster slouching can move the belt out of position.seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move thein the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85NOTE: For additional information, refer to Here are some tips on getting the most out of your childwww.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. restraint:Canadian residents should refer to Transport • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that itCanada’s website for additional information: 2 has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safetyhttp://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/ Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends thatindex.htm you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. WARNING! • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s • Improper installation can lead to failure of an weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a weight and height limits. collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex- • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the actly when installing an infant or child restraint. restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be not work when you need it. used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re- • Buckle the child into the seat according to the child straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy- restraint manufacturer’s directions. ing passenger air bag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
    • 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE having attachments for those anchorages will continue to WARNING! have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail- vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a able for some time. For some older child restraints, many sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re-Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) straint in any vehicle.Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child The two outboard seating positions have lower anchor-restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH ages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-system provides for the installation of the child restraint compatible child seats. You can also use the inboardwithout using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing mounting loops from the each outboard LATCH systemthe child restraint using lower anchorages and upper loops to install a child seat when the child seat istether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle equipped with flexible straps. You should never installstructure. LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats share aLATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail- common lower anchorage. If installing child seats inable. However, because the lower anchorages are to beintroduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87adjacent rear seating positions, or if your child restraints Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraintare not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using Systemthe vehicle’s seat belts. We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all 2 child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system. The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are located just below the button with the anchorage symbol on the rear seat, but are not visible. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces. LATCH Anchorages
    • 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In addition, there are tether strap anchorages of the seat cover material. Then, rotate the tether anchor- behind each rear seating position located in the age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing panel between the rear seatback and the rear the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the window. These tether strap anchorages are anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap tounder a plastic cover with this symbol on it. provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as youMany, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with push the child restraint rearward and downward into theseparate straps on each side, with each having a hook or seat, removing slack in the straps according to the childconnector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a restraint manufacturer’s instructions.means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant WARNING!restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, ahook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead tomeans of adjusting the tension of the strap. increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behindYou will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower the child seat to secure a child restraint top tetherstraps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily strap.attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89NOTE: WARNING!• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in Improper installation of a child restraint to the the strap. LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or 2 child restraint. The child could be badly injured or• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not when installing an infant or child restraint. being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the Belts seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the that the seat belts are not toys and should not be retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the played with, and never leave your child unattended in retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the vehicle.
    • 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE“Automatic Locking Mode”. The chart below defines the 1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enoughseating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it(ALR) or a cinching latch plate. through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch Driver Center Passenger plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Next, extract CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt First Row N/A N/A ALR retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates Second Row ALR ALR ALR the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.• N/A — Not Applicable 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear headseat where you are placing the child restraint. restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, 2 route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
    • 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS WARNING! A long break-in period is not required for the engine and An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. increased head motion and possible injury to the Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. strap. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within theTransporting Pets limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly mental and should be avoided.injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is aa collision. high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. OilPets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses changes should be consistent with anticipated climateor pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve- hicle”.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 CAUTION! WARNING! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil • Do not leave children or animals inside parked in the engine or damage may result. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may 2 cause serious injury or death.NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleshould be considered a normal part of the break-in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. ously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourSAFETY TIPS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatTransporting Passengers belts.NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andAREA. using a seat belt properly.
    • 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEExhaust Gas WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or coolingExhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Setmonoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. the blower at high speed.Breathing it can make you unconscious and caneventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intofollow these safety tips: the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in system. confined areas any longer than needed to move Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust your vehicle in or out of the area. system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is open, make sure that all windows are closed and damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or (Continued) loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The DefrosterVehicle Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able toSeat Belts feel the air directed against the windshield. See your 2Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, authorized dealer for service if your defroster isfrays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced inoperable.immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Floor Mat Safety InformationFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of yourcollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal areaa collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that theytorn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedalsor retractor condition, replace the belt. or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.Air Bag Warning LightThe light should come on and remain on for four to eightseconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is firstturned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see yourauthorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comeson while driving, have the system checked by an autho-rized dealer.
    • 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats thatsonal injury. have been removed for cleaning.• Always make sure that floor mats are properly • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the attached to the floor mat fasteners. driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-• Never place or install floor mats or other floor jects can become trapped under the brake pedal coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle secured to prevent them from moving and inter- control. fering with the pedals or the ability to control the • If required, mounting posts must be properly vehicle. installed, if not equipped from the factory.• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or top of already installed floor mats. Additional mounting can cause interference with the brake floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. of control of the vehicle. (Continued)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Door LatchesThe Vehicle Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.Tires Fluid LeaksExamine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, 2patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolinelodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, orand cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should beCheck the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires located and corrected immediately.(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.LightsHave someone observe the operation of exterior lightswhile you work the controls. Check turn signal and highbeam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 3Ⅵ Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Ⅵ Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 105 ▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Ⅵ Uconnect௡ Phone (Uconnect௡ 200) . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Approach Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 107 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ▫ Uconnect௡ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 108
    • 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 180 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Uconnect௡ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Ⅵ Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Ⅵ Uconnect௡ Phone (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ Uconnect௡ 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ▫ Uconnect௡ 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ Uconnect௡ Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ▫ Voice Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Ⅵ Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ▫ Uconnect௡ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ▫ Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Uconnect௡ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ▫ Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment . . . . . 204 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 ▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — IfⅥ Voice Command (Uconnect௡ 200) . . . . . . . . . . 180 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Ⅵ To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 3Ⅵ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 215 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Ⅵ Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 224 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 ▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 ▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 217 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
    • 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ▫ Parksense௡ Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 ▫ Parksense௡ Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 226 ▫ Parksense௡ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Ⅵ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 228 ▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense௡ . . . . . . . 243Ⅵ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . 229 ▫ Service The Parksense௡ Rear Park AssistⅥ Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 231 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Cleaning The Parksense௡ System . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Parksense௡ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 246 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Ⅵ Parkview௡ Rear Back Up Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ Turning Parkview௡ On Or Off — With Touch ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Ⅵ Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Ⅵ Parksense௡ Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 235 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 ▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 263Ⅵ Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 253 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ▫ Before You Begin Programming ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 263 HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 255 3 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 257 ▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 258 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Ⅵ Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . 266 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Ⅵ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Ⅵ Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
    • 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEⅥ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 ▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 ▫ Glovebox Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 ▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ▫ Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 ▫ Ski Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ▫ Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped . . . . . 275 Ⅵ Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . 276 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Ⅵ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105MIRRORSInside Day/Night MirrorA two-point pivot system allows for horizontal andvertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror tocenter on the view through the rear window. The mirrorshould be adjusted while set in the day position (toward 3the windshield).Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the smallcontrol lever under the mirror to the night position (leverflipped toward the rear of vehicle). Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.
    • 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is CAUTION!moving in reverse. To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. Automatic Dimming Mirror
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators, WARNING! which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard convex mirror will look smaller and farther away Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs. than they really are. Relying too much on your The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which passenger side convex mirror could cause you to turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote 3 collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. to the Front and Rear Doors.Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after aboutSome models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once thehinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to ignition is placed into the RUN position.resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full NOTE: The approach lighting will not function whenforward, full rearward and normal. the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And ApproachLighting — If EquippedDriver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signaland puddle lamp contain 3 LEDs.
    • 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPower Mirrors The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust atrim panel. mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- ther information. Power Mirror Control
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If EquippedAn illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the ing the visor to block out the sun.mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati- 1. Fold down the sun visor.cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light. 2. Unclip the visor from the center clip. 3 3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it. Illuminated Vanity Mirror
    • 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEBLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light willThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar- momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrorsbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to to let the driver know that the system is operational. Thedetect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in anymotorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by moderear/front/side of the vehicle. when the vehicle is in PARK. Rear Detection Zones BSM Warning Light
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in theon both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entirestarts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap- time the vehicle is in a forward gear.proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors aresystem monitors the detection zones on both sides of the located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/roadvehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 3 contamination so that the BSM system can function6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia wherevehicles in these areas. the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-NOTE: per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light detection zones. located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information. verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
    • 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEntering From The Side Entering From The RearVehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on eitherside of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113Overtaking TrafficIf you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speedof less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains inthe blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warninglight will be illuminated. If the difference in speedbetween the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 3(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Overtaking/Approaching
    • 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking/Passing Stationary ObjectsThe BSM system is designed not to issue an alert onstationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alerton such objects. This is normal operation and yourvehicle does not require service.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are WARNING!traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle inadjacent lanes. The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy- clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped 3 with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed Opposing Traffic slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
    • 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING! RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a RCP Detection Zones parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful whenRCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up, even when using RCP. Always checkthe vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and bethe vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi- obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail-mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.parking lot situations.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117Modes Of Operation alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chimeThree selectable modes of operation are available in the will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-Uconnect௡ System. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in tected object are present on the same side at the same“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. Information. addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) volume will be reduced. 3Blind Spot AlertWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSMview mirror based on a detected object. However, when system, the radio volume is reduced.the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will requestwith both visual and audible alerts when a detected the appropriate visual alert only.object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,the radio volume is reduced. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detectedBlind Spot Alert Lights/Chime object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status isthe BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If theturn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
    • 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEBlind Spot Alert Off NOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone requires a mobile phoneWhen the BSM system is turned off, there will be no equipped with the Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver-visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect௡ website for sup-systems. ported phones.NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating For Uconnect௡ customer support, visitmode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle www.UconnectPhone.com.is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled Uconnect௡ Phone allows you to transfer calls between theand used. system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit yourUconnectா Phone (Uconnectா 200) vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphoneUconnect௡ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- for private conversation.vehicle communications system. Uconnect௡ Phone al- Uconnect௡ features Bluetooth௡ technology - the globallows you to dial a phone number with your mobile standard that enables different electronic devices to con-phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your Uconnect௡ Phone works no matter where you stow yourmobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), ascle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute long as your phone is turned on and has been paired toyour radio when using the Uconnect௡ Phone. the vehicle’s Uconnect௡ Phone. The Uconnect௡ Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be Voice Command Buttonused with the system at a time. The system is available in When you press the Voice CommandEnglish, Spanish, or French languages. button you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. WARNING! The Uconnect௡ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free 3 Any voice commanded system should be used only Profile certified Bluetooth௡ mobile phone. See the in safe driving conditions following local laws and Uconnect௡ website for supported phones. Refer to your phone use. All attention should be kept on the mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a details. collision causing serious injury or death. The Uconnect௡ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-Uconnect௡ Phone Button cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect௡ Phone The steering wheel controls will contain the can be adjusted either from the radio volume control two control buttons (Uconnect௡ Phone knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right button and Voice Command button) that switch), if so equipped. will enable you to access the system. When you The radio display will be used for visual prompts frompress the Uconnect௡ Phone button you will hear a the Uconnect௡ Phone such as “Phone” or caller ID.BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
    • 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOperation example, you can use the compound form voiceVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect௡ command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can breakPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect௡ Phone the compound form command into two voice com-menu structure. Voice commands are required after most mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-Uconnect௡ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a member, the Uconnect௡ Phone works best when youspecific command and then guided through the available talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking tooptions. someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree the beep. Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.• For certain operations, compound commands can be Help Command used. For example, instead of saying “Setup”, “Device If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to Pairing” and then “Pair a Device”, the following know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following compound command can be said: “Setup”, “Device the beep. The Uconnect௡ Phone will then play some of Pairing” and “Pair a Bluetooth௡ Device”. the options.• For each feature explanation in this section, only the To activate the Uconnect௡ Phone, simply press the compound form of the voice command is given. You button and follow the audible prompts for directions. can also break the commands into parts and say each Uconnect௡ Phone sessions begin with a press of the part of the command when you are asked for it. For button on the steering wheel.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121Cancel Command The following are general phone to Uconnect௡ PhoneAt any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and pairing instructions:you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • Press the button to begin.few instances the system will take you back to theprevious menu. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Device Pairing”. 3Pair (Link) Uconnect௡ Phone To A Mobile PhoneTo begin using your Uconnect௡ Phone, you must pair • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”your compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone. and follow the audible prompts.To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- • For identification purposes, you will be prompted toence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The give the Uconnect௡ Phone a name for your mobileUconnect௡ website may also provide detailed instruc- phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should betions for pairing. given a unique phone name.NOTE: If other phones are present during the pairing • You will then be asked “Should paired device be set asprocess make sure they are switched to off or the Favorite?” If yes this phone will become the highestbluetooth is disabled before proceeding. priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect௡ Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect௡ System. The priority allows the
    • 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect௡ Phone to know which mobile • phone to • The Uconnect௡ Phone will confirm the phone number use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the and then dial. The number will appear in the display same time. of certain radios.• Start paring procedure on device. See device manual Call By Saying A Name for instructions. • Press the button to begin.• Select Uconnect௡ on the device and enter the four-digit • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Personal Identification Number (PIN) displayed on “Call”. radio into your mobile phone. • The system will prompt you to say the name of theDial By Saying A Number person you want to call.• Press the button to begin. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, “Dial”. you can say “john doe” or “john doe, mobile”, where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the• The system will prompt you to say the number you Uconnect௡ phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To want to call. learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”. “Add Names to Your Uconnect௡ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123• The Uconnect௡ system will confirm the name and then • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., dial the corresponding phone number, which may “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will appear in the display of certain radios. allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone- book entry, if desired.Add Names To Your Uconnect௡ Phonebook • When prompted, recite the phone number for theNOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect௡ Phonebook is 3 phonebook entry that you are adding.recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-• Press the button to begin. book, you will be given the opportunity to add more• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the “Phonebook New Entry”. main menu.• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of The Uconnect௡ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- names in the phonebook with each name having up to mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” four associated phone numbers and designations. Each instead of “Bob”. language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect௡ Phone automati- cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
    • 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEdit Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entries After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry inNOTE: the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu. when the vehicle is not in motion. “Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phone number to a name entry that already exists in the deleted or edited. phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a• Press the button to begin. mobile and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Entry” feature. “Phonebook Edit Entry”. Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone entry that you wish to edit. If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, Uconnect௡ Phone automatically downloads names (text mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect௡ phonebook entry that you are editing. website for supported phones.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125• To call a name from the Uconnect௡ Phonebook or • Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded. downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- “Call by Saying a Name” section. book. However, if there is less than 10 contacts in the mobile phone, the SIM contacts may also download.• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or made to the Uconnect௡ Phone, for example, after you deleted on the Uconnect௡ Phone. These can only be 3 start the vehicle. edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- ferred and updated to Uconnect௡ Phone on the next• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- phone connection. loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect௡ Phone. Delete Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entry• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest when the vehicle is not in motion. downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- • Press the button to begin. able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- able for use. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Phonebook Delete”.• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
    • 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entries then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish • Press the button to begin. to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook “Phonebook Erase All”. from which you choose. To select one of the entries • The Uconnect௡ Phone will ask you to verify that you from the list, press the button while the wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. Uconnect௡ Phone is playing the desired entry and say • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be “Delete”. deleted.• After you enter the name, the Uconnect௡ Phone will • Note that only the phonebook in the current language ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, is deleted. work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be wish to delete. deleted or edited.• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current List All Names In The Uconnect௡ Phonebook language is deleted. • Press the button to begin.• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Phonebook List Names”.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127• The Uconnect௡ Phone will play the names of all the Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- Currently In Progress book entries, if available. When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect௡ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,• To call one of the names in the list, press the if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. button during the playing of the desired name, and Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call, 3 say “Call”. press and hold the button until you hear a single• The Uconnect௡ Phone will then prompt you as to the beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected. number designation you wish to call. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call• The selected number will be dialed. Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have anotherPhone Call Features incoming call, you will hear the same network tones forThe following features can be accessed through the call waiting that you normally hear when using yourUconnect௡ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your mobile phone. Press the button to place the currentmobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service call on hold and answer the incoming call.plan provides three-way calling, this feature can beaccessed through the Uconnect௡ Phone. Check with yourmobile service provider for the features that you have.
    • 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone compatible phones in the Toggling Between Callsmarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can press the button until you hear a single beep,only answer an incoming call or ignore it. indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at aMaking A Second Call While Current Call Is In time.ProgressTo make a second call while you are currently on a call, Conference Callpress the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed When two calls are in progress (one active and one onby the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to hold), press and hold the button until you hear acall. The first call will be on hold while the second call is double beep indicating that the two calls have beenin progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling joined into one conference call.Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer Three-Way Callingto “Conference Call” in this section. To initiate three-way calling, press the button whilePlace/Retrieve A Call From Hold a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, asTo put a call on hold, press the button until you hear described under “Making a Second Call While Currenta single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,bring the call back from hold, press and hold the press and hold the button until you hear a doublebutton until you hear a single beep. beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129Call Termination Call ContinuationTo end a call in progress, momentarily press the Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on thebutton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if Uconnect௡ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has beenthere is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell 3 • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call canphone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press continue on the Uconnect௡ Phone either until the calland hold the button until you hear a single beep. ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictatesRedial cancellation of the call on the Uconnect௡ Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone.• Press the button to begin. • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say continue on the Uconnect௡ Phone for a certain dura- “Redial”. tion, after which the call is automatically transferred• The Uconnect௡ Phone will call the last number that from the Uconnect௡ Phone to the mobile phone. was dialed from your mobile phone.NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from theUconnect௡ Phone.
    • 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnectா Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone isLanguage Selection reachable:To change the language that the Uconnect௡ Phone isusing: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.• Press the button to begin. If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect௡ Phone is• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say operational, you may reach the emergency number as the name of the language you wish to switch to follows: English, Espanol, or Francais. • Press the button to begin.• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Emergency” and the Uconnect௡ Phone will instructAfter selecting one of the languages, all prompts and the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num-voice commands will be in that language. ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, andNOTE: After every Uconnect௡ Phone language change Mexico.operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone- NOTE:book is usable. The paired phone name is not language- • The emergency number dialed is based on the countryspecific and is usable across all languages. where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S., and
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Canada, 080 for Mexico). The number dialed may not Roadside Assistance be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need roadside assistance: area. • Press the button to begin.• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say some systems. To do this, press the button and say “Roadside Assistance”. 3 “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”. NOTE:• The Uconnect௡ Phone does slightly lower your • The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the chances of successfully making a phone call as com- country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 pared to using the mobile phone directly. for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City WARNING! in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour “Roadside Assis- To use your Uconnect௡ Phone System in an emer- tance” coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty gency, your mobile phone must be: Information Booklet and the 24-Hour Roadside Assis- • turned on, tance references. • paired to the Uconnect௡ System, • If supported, this number may be programmable on • and have network coverage. some systems. To do this, press the button and say “Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
    • 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPaging When calling a number with your Uconnect௡ Phone thatTo learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequenceSystems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of on your mobile phone keypad, you can press thecertain companies, which time out a little too soon to button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followedwork properly with the Uconnect௡ Phone. by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you canVoice Mail Calling press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. SayingTo learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,with Automated Systems”. is also to be used for navigating through an automatedWorking With Automated Systems customer service center menu structure, and to leave aThis method is used in instances where one generally has number on a pager.to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while You can also send stored Uconnect௡ phonebook entries asnavigating through an automated telephone system. tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish toYou can use your Uconnect௡ Phone to access a voice mail call and then press the button and say, “Send.” Thesystem or an automated service, such as a paging service system will prompt you to say the “number.” If you wishor automated customer service line. Some services re- to send the name say “Send Name” followed by a validquire immediate response selection. In some instances, name from the phonebook. Uconnect௡ Phone will thenthat may be too quick for use of the Uconnect௡ Phone. send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133NOTE: Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system network configurations. This is normal. from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect௡ Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the • Press the button to begin. use of this feature. 3 • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayBarge In — Overriding Prompts one of the following:The “Voice Command” button can be used when you − “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voicecommand immediately. For example, if a prompt is − “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you Phone And Network Status Indicatorscould press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to If available on the radio and/or on a premium displayselect that option without having to listen to the rest of such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported bythe voice prompt. your mobile phone, the Uconnect௡ Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect௡ Phone. The status is given for network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
    • 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone When you mute the Uconnect௡ Phone, you will still bekeypad and still use the Uconnect௡ Phone (while dialing able to hear the conversation coming from the othervia the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. Incaution and take precautionary safety measures). By order to mute the Uconnect௡ Phone:dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobile • Press the button.phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’saudio system. The Uconnect௡ Phone will work the same • Following the beep, say “Mute”.as if you dial the number using Voice Command. In order to un-mute the Uconnect௡ Phone:NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the • Press the button.dial ring to the Uconnect௡ Phone to play it on the vehicleaudio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- • Following the beep, say “Mute off”.tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel Advanced Phone Connectivitythat the call did not go through even though the call is inprogress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phoneaudio. The Uconnect௡ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135from your Uconnect௡ Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”.Uconnect௡ Phone or vice versa, press the button • The Uconnect௡ Phone will play the phone names of alland say “Transfer Call”. paired mobile phones in order from the highest to theConnect Or Disconnect Link Between The lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phoneUconnect௡ Phone And Mobile Phone being announced, press the button and sayYour mobile phone can be paired with many different “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for 3electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a pairedwith one electronic device at a time. phone.If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡ Select Another Mobile Phoneconnection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using anotherUconnect௡ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect௡ Phone.scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual. • Press the button to begin.List Paired Mobile Phone Names • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• Press the button to begin. “Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the button at any time while the “Setup Phone Pairing”. list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.
    • 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Things You Should Know About Your Uconnectா call. If the selected phone is not available, the Phone Uconnect௡ Phone will return to using the highest Uconnect௡ Phone Tutorial priority phone present in or near (approximately To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. button and say “Uconnect௡ Tutorial.”Delete Uconnect௡ Phone Paired Mobile Phones Voice Training• Press the button to begin. For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect௡• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this “Setup Phone Pairing”. training mode, follow one of the two following proce-• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the dures: prompts. From outside the Uconnect௡ Phone mode (e.g., from• You can also press the button at any time while the radio mode): list is being played, and then choose the phone you • Press and hold the button for five seconds until wish to delete. the session begins, or, • Press the button and say the “Voice Training, System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137You can either press the Uconnect௡ Phone button to Voice Commandrestore the factory setting or repeat the words and Uconnect௡ Voice Command Tutorialphrases when prompted by the Uconnect௡ Phone. For To hear a brief tutorial of the Voice Command features, pressbest results, the Voice Training session should be com- the button and say “Voice Command Tutorial.”pleted when the vehicle is parked with the enginerunning, all windows closed, and the blower fan • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead 3switched off. console (if equipped) and the mirror.This procedure may be repeated with a new user. Thesystem will adapt to the last trained voice only. • Always wait for the beep before speaking. • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldReset speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from• press the button. you.• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking “Setup”, then “Reset”. during a Voice Command period.This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, • Performance is maximized under:and other settings in all language modes. The System will • low-to-medium blower setting,prompt you before resetting to factory settings. • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
    • 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • low road noise, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect௡ Phone Lo- cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the • smooth road surface, entries are not similar. • fully closed windows, • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • dry weather condition. be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Even though international dialing for most number cents, the system may not always work for some. combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing• When navigating through an automated system such number combinations may not be supported. as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. compromised with the convertible top down.• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance not in motion is recommended. • Audio quality is maximized under:• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect௡ Phonebook. • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 • low road noise, Recent Calls If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- • smooth road surface, load”, Uconnect௡ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- • fully closed windows, ing and Missed Calls. • dry weather conditions, and Voice Text Reply Uconnect௡ Phone can read or send new messages on 3 • operation from the driver’s seat. your phone.• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Read Messages: to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and If you receive a new text message while your phone is not the Uconnect௡ Phone. connected to Uconnect௡ Phone and your phone is sup-• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced ported, an announcement will be made to notify you that by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new message:• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. • Press the button. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” • Uconnect௡ Phone will play the new text message for you.
    • 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAfter reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” List of Preset Messages:the message using Uconnect௡ Phone. 1. YesSend Messages: 2. NoYou can send messages using Uconnect௡ Phone. To senda new message: 3. Where are you?• Press the button. 4. I need more direction.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 5. LOL “SMS Send” or “Send Message.” 6. Why• You can either say the message you wish to send or say 7. I love you “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages. 8. Call meTo send a message, press the button while thesystem is listing the message and say “Send.” 9. Call me laterUconnect௡ Phone will prompt you to say the name or 10. Thanksnumber of the person you wish to send the message to. 11. See You in 15 minutes 12. I am on my way
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 14113. I’ll be late Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop14. Are you there yet? the system from announcing the new incoming mes-15. Where are we meeting? sages.16. Can this wait? • Press the button. 317. Bye for now • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you18. When can we meet will then be given a choice to change it.19. Send number to call Bluetooth௡ Communication Link20. Start without me Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect௡ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth௡ ON mode.
    • 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 3
    • 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145General Information Uconnect௡ Phone supports the following features:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Activated Features:RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions: • Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths Mo- bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the • Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming 3 user’s authority to operate the equipment. SMS messages. • Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John• This device may not cause harmful interference. Smiths Mobile”).• This device must accept any interference received, • Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). including interference that may cause undesired operation. • Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”).Uconnectா Phone (8.4/8.4N) • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,Uconnectா 8.4/8.4 Nav “Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “ShowUconnect௡ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- Recent Calls”).vehicle communications system. Uconnect௡ Phone al- • Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for Johnlows you to dial a phone number with your mobile Smith Mobile”).phone.
    • 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEScreen Activated Features: NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth௡ for messaging features to work properly.• Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen. Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically played on the touch-screen. mute your radio when using the Uconnect௡ Phone.• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are For Uconnect௡ customer support, visit easily accessible on the Main Phone screen. www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400.• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs. Uconnect௡ Phone allows you to transfer calls between the• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS. system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone• Sending a text message via the touch-screen. for private conversation.• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth௡ Device via the touch-screen.• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 one audio device can be used with the system at a time. WARNING! The system is available in English, Spanish, or French Any voice commanded system should be used only languages. in safe driving conditions following local applicable Uconnect௡ Phone Button laws and phone use. All attention should be kept on The Uconnect௡ Phone Button is used to get the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an into the phone mode and make calls, show 3 accident causing serious injury or death. recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone- book etc., When you press the button you willThe Uconnect௡ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth௡ hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect௡ featuresBluetooth௡ technology - the global standard that enables Uconnect௡ Voice Command Buttondifferent electronic devices to connect to each other The Uconnect௡ Voice Command Buttonwithout wires or a docking station, so Uconnect௡ Phone is only used for “barge in” and when you areworks no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be already in a call and you want to send Tones orit your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone make another call.is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s The button is also used to access the Voice CommandsUconnect௡ Phone. The Uconnect௡ Phone allows up to ten for the Uconnect௡ Voice Command features if your vehicle ismobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the equipped. Please see the Uconnect௡ Voice Command sectionsystem. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and for direction on how to use the button.
    • 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe Uconnect௡ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- You will be prompted for a specific command and thencle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect௡ Phone guided through the available options.can be adjusted either from the radio volume control • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait forknob or from the steering wheel radio control (right the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or an-switch), if so equipped. other prompt.Operation • For certain operations, compound commands can beVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect௡ used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and thenPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect௡ Phone “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-menu structure. Voice commands are required after most pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-Uconnect௡ Phone prompts. There are two general meth- bile”.ods for how Voice Command works: • For each feature explanation in this section, only the1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo- compound command form of the voice command isbile”. given. You can also break the commands into parts2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to and say each part of the command when you are askedguide you to complete the task. for it. For example, you can use the compound com- mand form voice command “Search for John Smith”,
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 or you can break the compound command form into The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase two voice commands: “Search Contact” and when or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly asked “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect௡ Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver- tence, the system identifies the topic or context and sational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who feet/meters away from you. do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was 3 requested but the specific name was not recognized.Natural SpeechYour Uconnect௡ Phone Voice system uses a Natural The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the systemLanguage Voice Recognition (VR) engine. requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressingNatural speech allows the user to speak commands in the Voice Command button.phrases or complete sentences. The system filters outcertain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” Voice Command Treeand “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.would like to”. Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the beep.
    • 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo activate the Uconnect௡ Phone from idle, simply press Pair (Link) Uconnect௡ Phone To A Mobile Phonethe button and say a command or say “help”. All To begin using your Uconnect௡ Phone, you must pairUconnect௡ Phone sessions begin with a press of the your compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone.button on the radio control head. To complete the pairing process, you will need to referenceCancel Command your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect௡ web-At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.you will be returned to the main menu. NOTE:You can also press the or buttons when the • You must have Bluetooth௡ enabled on your phone tosystem is listening for a command and be returned to the complete this procedure.main or previous menu. • The vehicle must be in PARK.NOTE: Pressing the or buttons while the 1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.system is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to“Barge In — Overriding Prompts” for further 2. If there is no phone currently connected with theinformation. system, a pop-up will appear.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 • If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Uconnect௡ Phone main screen, • Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the 3 phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect௡ screen, • See Step 4 to complete the process.3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, searchfor available devices on your Bluetooth௡ enabled mobilephone. When prompted on the phone, enter the nameand PIN shown on the Uconnect௡ screen.
    • 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE4. Uconnect௡ Phone will display an in process screen Pair Additional Mobile Phoneswhile the system is connecting. • Touch the “More” soft-key to begin, • Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect௡ screen, • Uconnect௡ Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting,5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, • When the pairing process has successfully completed,the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this the system will prompt you to choose whether or notis your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make thisthe highest priority. This phone will take precedence over phone the highest priority. This phone will take pre-other paired phones within range. cedence over other paired phones within range.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio: • “Show Paired Phones” or • “Connect My Phone” Pair A Bluetooth௡ Streaming Audio Device 3 • Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin, • Change the Source to Bluetooth௡, • Touch the “Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, thephone priority is determined by the order in which it was NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with thepaired. The latest phone paired will have the higher system, a pop-up will appear.priority. • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- abled audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect௡ screen,
    • 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Uconnect௡ Phone will display an in process screen Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or while the system is connecting, Audio Device Uconnect௡ Phone will automatically connect to the high-• When the pairing process has successfully completed, est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within the system will prompt you to choose whether or not range. If you would need to choose a particular phone or this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make Audio Device follow these steps: this device the highest priority. This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range. • Touch the “Settings” soft-key,NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key,device priority is determined by the order in which it was • Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Pairedpaired. The latest device paired will have the higher Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,priority. • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.You can also use the following VR command to bring upa list of paired audio devices. Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device• “Show Paired Audio Devices” • Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key,
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite name, • Touch the “Settings” soft-key,• The options pop-up will be displayed, • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key,• Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key, • Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. name, 3Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device • The options pop-up will be displayed,• Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list,• Touch the Phone/Bluetooth௡ soft-key, • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook currently connected device, Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,• The options pop-up will be displayed, Uconnect௡ Phone automatically downloads names (text• Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key, names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
    • 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEphonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect௡ able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-website for supported phones. able for use.• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook, • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” phone is accessible. section. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins deleted on the Uconnect௡ Phone. These can only be as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- made to the Uconnect௡ Phone, for example, after you ferred and updated to Uconnect௡ Phone on the next start the vehicle. phone connection.• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- Managing Your Favorite Phonebook loaded and updated every time a phone is connected There are three ways you can add an entry to your to the Uconnect௡ Phone. Favorite Phonebook.• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- 1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite, loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1572. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phone- NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked tobook from the Phone main screen, then select the appro- remove an existing favorite.priate number. Touch the + next to the selected number to 3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. Fromdisplay the options pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add to the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key andFavorites”. then select the + soft-key located to the right of the phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch the + 3 on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears, touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be asked which
    • 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEcontact and number to choose from your mobile phone- • Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen andbook. When complete the new favorite will be shown. then touch the + Options soft-key. • Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to remove.To Remove A Favorite• To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the Phone main screen. • The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from Favs”.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159Emergency And Towing AssistanceThe Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can onlybe altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannotbe changed.To change the Emergency or Towing number follow thesesteps. 3• Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main screen.• Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites. • The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose• Touch the + Options soft-key. between Editing the number or resetting the number to default.• Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered. Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect௡ Phone if the feature(s) are available and supported by Bluetooth௡ on your mobile service plan.
    • 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFor example, if your mobile service plan provides three- NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can beway calling, this feature can be accessed through the done with 1 call or less active.Uconnect௡ Phone. Check with your mobile service pro- Dial By Saying A Numbervider for the features that you have. • Press the button to begin,Ways To Initiate A Phone CallListed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,with Uconnect௡ Phone. say “Dial 248-555-1212”,• Redial • The Uconnect௡ Phone will dial the number 248-555-1212.• Dial by touching in the number Call By Saying A Phonebook Name• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back) • Press the button to begin,• Favorite Phonebook • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile”,• Mobile Phonebook • The Uconnect௡ Phone will dial the number associated• Recent Call Log with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will• SMS Message Viewer ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161Call Controls Touch-Tone Number EntryThe touch-screen allows you to control the following call • Touch the “Phone” soft-key,features: • Touch the “Dial” soft-key,• Answer • The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,• End 3 • Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and• Ignore touch “Call”.• Hold/unhold To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press• Mute/unmute the button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail• Transfer the call to/from the phone password is stored in your mobile phonebook.• Swap 2 active calls• Join 2 active calls together
    • 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLERecent Calls These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the soft-key on the Phone main screen.following call types: You can also press the button and say “Show my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed. NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”, “Recent” or “Missed”. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect௡ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the button to accept the call. To ignore the call,• Incoming Calls touch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You can also touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the blue caller• Outgoing Calls ID box.• Missed Calls• All Calls
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call call. The first call will be on hold while the second call isCurrently In Progress in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touchingIf a call is currently in progress and you have another the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial aincoming call, you will hear the same network tones for number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or fromcall waiting that you normally hear when using your the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer tomobile phone. Press the phone button, answer “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine two 3soft-key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.and answer the incoming call. Place/Retrieve A Call From HoldNOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone compatible phones in the During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on themarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call Phone main screen.when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Toggling Between Callsonly answer an incoming call or ignore it. If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.Progress Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.To make a second call while you are currently on a call, You can also press the button to toggle between thepress the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed active and held phone call.by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
    • 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEJoin Calls • The Uconnect௡ Phone will call the last number thatWhen two calls are in progress (one active and one on was dialed from your mobile phone.hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main Call Continuationscreen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on theCall Termination Uconnect௡ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has beenTo end a call in progress, momentarily press the switched to OFF.button or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audioterminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become system until the phone becomes out of range for thethe new active call. If the active call is terminated by the Bluetooth௡ connection. It is recommended to press thefar end, a call on hold may not become active automati- “transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.cally. This is cell phone-dependent. Uconnectா Phone FeaturesRedial Emergency Assistance• Press the “Redial” soft-key, If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is• or press the and after the “Listening” prompt and reachable: the following beep, say “Redial”, • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, number for your area. say “Redial”,
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect௡ Phone is • The Uconnect௡ Phone does slightly lower youroperational, you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to thatfollows: for the mobile phone directly.• Press the button to begin. WARNING!• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, 3 Your phone must be turned on and connected to the say “Call Emergency or Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect௡ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature Uconnect௡ Phone will instruct the paired mobile in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has phone to call the emergency number. This feature is network coverage and stays connected to the supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. Uconnect௡ Phone.NOTE:• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the Roadside Assistance touch-screen. If you need roadside assistance:• The emergency number dialed is based on the country • Press the button to begin. where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may say “Roadside Assistance”. not be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
    • 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: You can use your Uconnect௡ Phone to access a voice mail• The roadside assistance call may also be initiated by system or an automated service, such as a paging service touch. or automated customer service line. Some services re- quire immediate response selection. In some instances,• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect௡ Phone. country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for When calling a number with your Uconnect௡ Phone that Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the touch-screen or press the button and say the word Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24–Hour Road- “Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example, side Assistance Card. if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7Voice Mail Calling 4 6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequenceTo learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working of numbers, is also to be used for navigating through anwith Automated Systems”. automated customer service center menu structure, andWorking With Automated Systems to leave a number on a pager.This method is used in instances where one generally hasto press numbers on the mobile phone keypad whilenavigating through an automated telephone system.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as • Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported bytones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager some phones are not supported over Bluetooth௡.entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone- These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial-book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail ing a numbered sequence.Password”, then if you press the button and say Barge In — Overriding Prompts“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect௡ Phone will The button can be used when you wish to skip part 3then send the corresponding phone number associated of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone. For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbersNOTE: with the name John. Say the full name” you could press the• The first number encountered for that contact will be button and say, “John Smith” to select that option sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt. ignored. Voice Response Length• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone It is possible for you to choose between Brief and network configurations. This is normal. Detailed Voice Response Length.• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time • Touch the “More” soft-key, then touch the “Settings” out settings that are too short and may not allow the soft-key, use of this feature. • Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice Response Length,
    • 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box audio system. The Uconnect௡ Phone will work the same next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to as if you dial the number using voice command. show your selection. NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send thePhone And Network Status Indicators dial ring to the Uconnect௡ Phone to play it on the vehicleUconnect௡ Phone will provide notification to inform you audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-of your phone and network status when you are attempt- tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feeling to make a phone call using Uconnect௡ Phone. The that the call did not go through even though the call is instatus is given for network signal strength and phone progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear thebattery strength. audio.Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone When you mute the Uconnect௡ Phone, you will still bekeypad and still use the Uconnect௡ Phone (while dialing able to hear the conversation coming from the othervia the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. Incaution and take precautionary safety measures). By order to mute the Uconnect௡ Phone simply touch thedialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobile Mute button on the Phone main screen.phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your Uconnectா PhoneTransfer Call To And From Mobile PhoneThe Uconnect௡ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Commandferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror towithout terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead 3from your Uconnect௡ Phone paired mobile phone to the console (if equipped) and the mirror.Uconnect௡ Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer buttonon the Phone main screen. • Always wait for the beep before speaking.Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldUconnect௡ Phone And Mobile Phone speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away fromIf you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡ you.connection between a Uconnect௡ Phone paired mobile • Make sure that no one other than you is speakingphone and the Uconnect௡ Phone, follow the instructions during a voice command period.described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
    • 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Performance is maximized under: • Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. • low-to-medium blower setting, • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • Even though international dialing for most number • low road noise, combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • smooth road surface, number combinations may not be supported. • fully closed windows, • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. • dry weather condition. Far End Audio Performance• Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Audio quality is maximized under: cents, the system may not always work for some. • low-to-medium blower setting,• When navigating through an automated system such • low-to-medium vehicle speed, as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. • low road noise,• Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the • smooth road surface, vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 • fully closed windows, Uconnect௡ Phone determines your phone is not compat- ible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth௡ the “Messag- • dry weather conditions, and ing” button will be greyed out and the feature will not be • operation from the driver’s seat. available for use.• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness NOTE: Uconnect௡ Phone SMS is only available when to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and the vehicle is not in moving. 3 not the Uconnect௡ Phone.• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.Voice Text ReplyUconnect௡ Phone can read or send new messages onyour phone.Your phone must support SMS (Short Message Service)over Bluetooth௡ in order to use this feature. If the
    • 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLERead Messages: Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,If you receive a new text message while your phone is you will have the following options:connected to Uconnect௡ Phone, an announcement will be • Send a Replymade to notify you that you have a new text message. • Forward • Call Send Messages Using Soft-Keys: You can send messages using Uconnect௡ Phone. To send a new message: • Touch the “Phone” soft-key, • Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173• Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person Send Messages Using Voice Commands: you wish to send the message to, • Press the button, • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Send message to John Smith mobile”, • After the system prompts you for what message you 3 want to send, say the message you wish to send or say “List”. There are 18 preset messages. While the list of defined messages are being read, you can interrupt the system by pressing the button and saying the message you want to send.• If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent,• Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
    • 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAfter the system confirms that you want to send your 3. Okay.message to John Smith, your message will be sent. 4. I can’t talk right now. 5. Call me. 6. I’ll call you later. 7. I’m on my way. 8. Thanks. 9. I’ll be late. 10. I will be <number> minutes late. 11. See you in <number> minutes. 12. Stuck in traffic.List of Preset Messages:1. Yes.2. No.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 17513. Start without me. Bluetooth௡ Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the14. Where are you? Uconnect௡ Phone. When this happens, the connection15. Are you there yet? can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain16. I need directions. in Bluetooth௡ ON mode. 317. I’m lost. Power-Up18. See you later. After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
    • 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Tree
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177NOTE: • You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your number supported by your Mobile phone. mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send • You can replace “4” with any message number shown a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you on the screen. which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith. • If your phone does not support phonebook download 3 or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or mands will return a response that the contact does not “Other”. exist in the phonebook.• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and Calls” or “Missed Calls”. underlined in the gray shaded boxes.• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect௡ system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
    • 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179NOTE: • If your phone does not support phonebook download• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your or call log download over Bluetooth than these com- mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send mands will return a response that the contact does not a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you exist in the phonebook. which phone number you want to send a message to • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and for John Smith. 3 underlined in the gray shaded boxes.• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or General Information “Other”. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the Calls” or “Missed Calls”. following conditions:• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect௡ • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by system is equipped with this feature and the mobile the party responsible for compliance could void the phone supports messaging over Bluetooth. user’s authority to operate the equipment.• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone • This device may not cause harmful interference. number supported by your Mobile phone. • This device must accept any interference received,• You can replace “4” with any message number shown including interference that may cause undesired on the screen. operation.
    • 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVOICE COMMAND (Uconnectா 200) When you press the Voice Command button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give aVoice Command System Operation command. This Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few player, and a memo recorder. seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it listsSystem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of options, press the Voice Command button, listenthe Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com- for the beep, and say your command.mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or araised voice level. Pressing the Voice Command button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system WARNING! will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you Any voice commanded system should be used only start to learn the options. in safe driving conditions following local applicable laws. All attention should be kept on the roadway NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision “Help” or “Main Menu”. causing serious injury or death.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181These commands are universal and can be used from any Changing the Volumemenu. All other commands can be used depending upon 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Commandthe active application. button.When using this system, you should speak clearly and at 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).a normal speaking volume. 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the 3The system will best recognize your speech if the win- volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Commanddows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is system is speaking. Please note the volume setting forset to low. Voice Command is different than the audio system.At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your Main Menucommands, you will be prompted to repeat it. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice CommandTo hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the mainmand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”. menu.Commands In this mode, you can say the following commands:The Voice Command system understands two types of • “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)commands. Universal commands are available at alltimes. Local commands are available if the supported • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)radio mode is active.
    • 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)• “Setup” (to switch to system setup) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)Radio AM • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In Satellite Radiothis mode, you may say the following commands: To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-• “Next Station” (to select the next station) mands:• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number)• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)Radio FMTo switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In • “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) this mode, you may say the following commands:Disc • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During theTo switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you recording, you may press the Voice Commandmay say the following commands: 3 button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of• “Track” (#) (to change the track) the following commands:• “Next Track” (to play the next track) − “Save” (to save the memo)• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) − “Continue” (to continue recording)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) − “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may press the Voice Command button to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands: − “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) − “Next” (to play the next memo)
    • 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE − “Previous” (to play the previous memo) • “Language Spanish” − “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Tutorial”• “Delete All” (to delete all memos) • “Voice Training”Setup NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VoiceTo switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command button first and wait for the beep beforefollowing: speaking the “Barge In” commands.• “Change to setup” Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-• “Switch to system setup” nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect௡• “Change to setup” Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.• “Main menu setup” or 1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice• “Switch to setup” Training.” This will train your own voice to the systemIn this mode, you may say the following commands: and will improve recognition.• “Language English”• “Language French”
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1852. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice CommandUconnect௡ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability ofsession should be completed when the vehicle is parked, the Voice Command system to recognize user voiceengine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan commands may be negatively affected by rapid speakingswitched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new or a raised voice level.user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. 3 WARNING!VOICE COMMAND Any voice commanded system should be used onlyUconnectா 8.4/8.4 Nav in safe driving conditions following local applicable The Uconnect௡ Voice Command system allows laws. All attention should be kept on the roadway you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and causing serious injury or death. Sirius Travel Link.
    • 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen you press the Uconnect௡ Voice Command Pressing the Uconnect௡ Voice Command buttonbutton, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”give a command. The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can say a command. This will become helpful once youIf no command is spoken the system will say one of two start to learn the options.responses: NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or• I didn’t understand “Help”.• I didn’t get that, etc., These commands are universal and can be used from anyIf a command is not spoken a second time, the system menu. All other commands can be used depending uponwill respond with an error and give some direction as the active application.what can be said based on the context you are in. Afterthree consecutive failures of a spoken command the VRsession with end.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187When using this system, you should speak clearly and at Natural Speecha normal speaking volume. Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters outThe system will best recognize your speech if the win- certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “Iset to low. would like to”. 3At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrasecommands, you will be prompted to repeat it. or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to KellyTo hear available commands, press the Uconnect௡ Voice Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-Command button and say “Help”. You will hear tence, the system identifies the topic or context andavailable commands for the screen displayed. provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized. The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect௡ Voice Command button.
    • 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnectா Voice Commands Changing the VolumeThe Uconnect௡ Voice Command system understands two 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Commandtypes of commands. Universal commands are available at button.all times. Local commands are available if the supportedradio mode is active. 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect௡ Voice Com- 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust themand button. volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in DiscRadio/Player Modes To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”.In this mode, you can say the following commands: This command can be given in any mode or screen:NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when • “Track” (#) (to change the track)a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect௡ VoiceCommand button. 3
    • 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Tree
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191NOTE: 4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM types.frequency, such as “98.7 FM”. 5. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite and shaded grey.station name received by the radio. 33. You can replace “8” with any other satellite stationnamed received by the radio.
    • 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193NOTE: 3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist, available when the iPod is connected and playing.podcast and audio book names with any corresponding 4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names arenames on the current device that is playing. based on the music database provided by Gracenote.2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is 5. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face 3currently playing. Command is only available when CD and shaded grey.is playing.
    • 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195NOTE: 3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or “Showsports league screen. For example you can say “Show ski info” to get other forecasts.MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”. 4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items and shaded grey.shown on a league screen. For example you can say 3“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAABasketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League BaseballTeams”.
    • 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197NOTE: 3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles. Navigation.2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”, 4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face“Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”. and shaded grey. 3
    • 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199NOTE: 2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”,1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find “Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Entertain-Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find Recently ment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Community”,Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”. “Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Airport”, “Po- lice Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto Dealers”. 3
    • 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESEATS Power Seats — If EquippedSeats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with a power driver’svehicle. seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the WARNING! seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Power Seat Switch
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward WARNING! (Continued)The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatmove in the direction of the switch. Release the switch belts and while the vehicle is parked. Seriouswhen the desired position has been reached. injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down 3The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pullupward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat CAUTION!will move in the direction of the switch. Release the Do not place any article under a power seat orswitch when the desired position has been reached. impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if WARNING! movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. path. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. (Continued)
    • 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEReclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward WARNING!The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that theseatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.the switch when the desired position has been reached. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Power Lumbar — If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. Power Seat Recliner Switch
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 3 Power Lumbar Switch Front Seat AdjustmentManual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move theOn models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you havebar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
    • 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.Manual Front Seat Recline AdjustmentTo adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the Recline Leveroutboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired WARNING!position and release the lever. To return the seatback, liftthe lever, lean forward and release the lever. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped Heated Seats — If EquippedThe driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by On some models, the front seats may be equipped withusing a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push The front driver and passenger heated seats are operateddownward on the lever to lower the seat height. using the Uconnect௡ System. 3 WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex- haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. (Continued) Seat Height Adjustment
    • 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.Front Heated Seat Operations — Uconnect௡ 8.4 and8.4 Nav:Touch the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom ofthe Uconnect௡ display. Controls Soft-Key Touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to select HI-level heating. Touch the soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating. Touch the soft-key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 system will automatically switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati- cally after a maximum of 45 minutes. Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start 3 On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further Heated Seats Soft-Keys information.NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt Head Restraintswithin two to five minutes. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rearWhen the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the topprovide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to thenormal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
    • 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The AHRs will automatically return to their normal WARNING! position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- return to their normal position see your authorized erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- dealer immediately. pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push or removed could cause serious injury or death in the downward on the head restraint. event of a collision.Active Head Restraints — Front SeatsThe front driver and passenger seats are equipped withActive Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rearimpact the AHRs will automatically extend forwardminimizing the gap between the back of the occupantshead and the AHR.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a 3 collision and could result in serious injury or death. Rear Head Restraints The rear outboard head restraints have three positions UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is Push Button being occupied the head restraint should be in the raisedNOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by position. When there are no occupants in the center seatqualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibilityof the head restraints require removal, see your autho- for the driver.rized dealer.
    • 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Folding Rear Seatrestraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide anbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and push additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull ondownward on the head restraint. the loops located on the upper seatback. NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use. Push Button Rear Seatback Loops
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. WARNING! • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An 3 improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint Folded Rear Seatback system.When the seatback is folded to the upright position, makesure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of theseatback above the seat strap.
    • 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safetyTwo latches must be released to open the hood. catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left sideof the instrument panel. Hood Safety Latch Hood Release Lever
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2133. Lift upward on the hood prop rod to release from 4. Place the hood prop rod in hood slot to secure thestowage retainer. hood in the open position. 3 Hood Prop Rod Hood Prop Rod Slot
    • 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS CAUTION! Headlight SwitchTo prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to The headlight switch is located on the left side ofclose it. Lower the hood, until it is open approxi- the instrument panel. This switch controls themately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. rior lights and fog lights. WARNING!Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving yourvehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could openwhen the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.Failure to follow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights 3 will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position. NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- Headlight Switch lights will come on in the automatic mode.Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent Headlights On With Wipers (Available Withfor parking light and instrument panel light operation. Automatic Headlights Only)Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onheadlight, parking light and instrument panel light approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned onoperation. if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position.
    • 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIn addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they willare turned off if they were turned on by this feature. turn off in the normal manner.NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be NOTE:turned on or off using the Uconnect௡ System, refer to • The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of“Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate thisment Panel” for further information. feature.Headlight Time Delay • The headlight delay time is programmable using theThis feature provides the safety of headlight illumination Uconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” infor up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furthervehicle in an unlit area. information.To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF SmartBeam™ — If Equippedposition while the headlights are still on. Then, turn offThe SmartBeam™ system provides increased forwardthe headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval lighting at night by automating high beam controlbegins when the headlight switch is turned off. through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place cific light and automatically switches from high beams tothe ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.delay.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced, the NOTE:SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper • SmartBeam™ can be turned on or off using theperformance. See your local authorized dealer. Uconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherTo Activate information.1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight 3 • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillightsposition. of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt,front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode. film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to functionNOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is improperly.at or above 20 mph (32 km/h). Daytime Running Lights (DRL)To Deactivate The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward ignition is placed in the RUN position, the headlights arein car) to manually deactivate the system (normal opera- off and the parking brake is off. The headlight switchtion of low beams). must be used for normal nighttime driving.2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again toreactivate the system.
    • 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned onand off using the Uconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignitionis placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alertthe driver when the driver’s door is opened.Fog Lights — If EquippedThe front fog light switch is built into the headlightswitch. Fog Light Switch To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminateswhen the fog lights are turned on.NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beamheadlights or parking lights on. However, selecting thehigh beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. 3Multifunction LeverThe multifunction lever controls the operation of the turnsignals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. Themultifunction lever is located on the left side of thesteering column. Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
    • 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: High/Low Beam Switch• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is Flash-To-Pass defective. You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This (if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either released. turn signal on. NOTE: If the flash to pass is held for 20 seconds theLane Change Assist feature will deactivate.Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Front Map/Reading Lightsthe detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each lightthree times then automatically turn off. can be turned on by pressing the lens.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time. Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on 3 because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch. Front Map/Reading LightsThe lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lightswill also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKEis pressed.
    • 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDimmer Controls With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the leftThe dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness oflocated on the left side of the instrument panel. the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if equipped). Dimmer Controls Instrument Panel Dimmer
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223Ambient Light Control Dome Light PositionRotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to theincrease or decrease the brightness of the door handle second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interiorlights and ambient light located in the overhead console. lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position. Interior Light Defeat (OFF) 3 Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open. Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park- ing lights or headlights are on. Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
    • 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper SystemThe multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditionsand washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-the left side of the steering column. tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 Mist Feature CAUTION! Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road through an automatic car wash. Damage to the mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will windshield wipers may result if the wiper control continue to operate until you release the multifunction is left in any position other than off. lever. 3• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the position before turning off the engine. If the wiper windshield. The wash function must be used in order to switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the spray the windshield with washer fluid. windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. Windshield Washers• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward the windshield wiper blades from returning to the (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as off position. If the windshield wiper control is washer spray is desired. turned off and the blades cannot return to the off If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
    • 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIf you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned onturned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and off using the Uconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡and then turn off. Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield This feature senses moisture on the windshield and could lead to a collision. You might not see other automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray the windshield during freezing weather, warm the from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate windshield with the defroster before and during the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings windshield washer use. to activate this feature. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with theHeadlights On With Wipers (Available with multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the leastAutomatic Headlights Only) sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires lessif the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driveraddition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers willturned off if they were turned on by this feature.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow The Rain Sensing system has protective features for thewipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under themoisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the following conditions:wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensingsystem. feature will not operate when the ignition is placed inThe Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the 3the Uconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, theformation. vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or the outside temperature rises above freezing.NOTE:• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will wiper speed is in the low or high position. not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the transmission shift lever is in the NEU-• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind- 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the shield. multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is• Use of Rain-X௡ or products containing wax or silicone moved out of the NEUTRAL position. may reduce rain sensor performance.
    • 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN To unlock the steering column, pull the control handleThis feature allows you to tilt the steering column down. To tilt the steering column, move the steeringupward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen orshorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheelhandle is located below the steering wheel at the end of outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steeringthe steering column. column in position, push the control handle up until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve- hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPEDThe steering wheel contains a heating element that helpswarm your hands in cold weather. The heated steeringwheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heatedsteering wheel has been turned on it will operate forapproximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically 3shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off earlyor may not turn on when the steering wheel is alreadywarm.The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off usingthe Uconnect௡ System.Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated Controls Soft-KeySteering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steeringwheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key asecond time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
    • 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex- haustion, or other physical conditions must exer- cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe- Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key cially if used for long periods.NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated • Do not place anything on the steering wheel thatsteering wheel to operate. insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This mayVehicles Equipped With Remote Start cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.On models that are equipped with remote start, theheated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDWhen engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes overaccelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph(40 km/h).The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on theright side of the steering wheel. 3 Electronic Speed Control Switches 1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL 3 — SET - NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec- tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
    • 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESystem can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired SpeedSpeed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.vehicle set speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steadyTo Activate speed and on level ground before pressing the SETPush the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the button.Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illumi- When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pressnate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator andsecond time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.system should be turned off when not in use. NOTE: After pressing the SET button “Cruise Control WARNING! Set” message is displayed for 5 seconds or until another switch is pressed. Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally For analog speedometer: The red outer line on the set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. speedometer changes from red to white to identify set You could lose control and have an accident. Always speed. leave the system OFF when you are not using it. For digital speedometer: The MPH reading turns from white to red to identify set speed.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233To Deactivate To Resume SpeedA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the button and release. Resume can be used at any speedvehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without above 20 mph (32 km/h).erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF To Vary The Speed Settingbutton or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set 3 When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-speed memory. crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the buttonNOTE: After pressing the OFF button a “Cruise Control is continually pressed, the set speed will continue tooff” message is displayed for 5 seconds or until another increase until the button is released, then the new setswitch is pressed. speed will be established.For analog speedometer: The white outer line on the Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mphspeedometer returns to red. (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).For digital speedometer: The MPH reading returns fromred to white. To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
    • 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEdecrease until the button is released. Release the button NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintainswhen the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed speed up and down hills. A slight speed change onwill be established. moderate hills is normal.Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speedthe button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h). Control.NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph ( 1 km/h ) depends on WARNING!selection of US or Metric units using the left handSteering Wheel Buttons, and EVIC display. Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-To Accelerate For Passing hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and youPress the accelerator as you would normally. When the could lose control and have an accident. Do not usepedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roadsUsing Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain thevehicle set speed.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235PARKSENSEா REAR PARK ASSIST — IF ParkSenseா SensorsEQUIPPED The four ParkSense௡ sensors, located in the rear fascia/The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system provides visual bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that isand audible indications of the distance between the rear within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detectfascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 induring a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense௡ System (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal 3Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-recommendations. tion of the obstacle.ParkSense௡ will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSenseா Warning Displaydisabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense௡ Warning screen will only be displayed ifchanged to the ON/RUN position. Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect௡ Sys- tem. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “UnderstandingParkSense௡ can be active only when the shift lever is in Your Instrument Panel” for further information.REVERSE. If ParkSense௡ is enabled at this shift leverposition, the system will remain active until the vehiclespeed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) orabove. The system will become active again if the vehiclespeed is decreased to speeds less than approximately6 mph (9 km/h).
    • 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe ParkSense௡ Warning screen is located within the ParkSenseா DisplayElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning displayvisual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear will turn ON indicating the system status.fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” inUnderstanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation. Park Assist Ready
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 If an object is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. 3 If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound Park Assist System OffThe system will indicate a detected obstacle by showinga single arc in one or more regions based on the object’sdistance and location relative to the vehicle.
    • 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEtone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, thedisplay will show the single arc moving closer to thevehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, tocontinuous. Slow Tone One-Half Second Tone
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 3Slow Tone Fast Tone
    • 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone Fast Tone
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 3Continuous Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera- tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
    • 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING ALERTS Rear Dis- Greater than 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than tance 79 in (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (in/cm) (200 cm) (30 cm) Audible None Single 1/2- Slow (for Slow (for Fast (for Fast Continuous Alert Second Tone rear center rear center rear center Chime (for rear only) only) only) center only)Arc — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing Rear ingArc — Cen- None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing ter Rear ingArc — Right None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing Rear ing
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243Enabling And Disabling ParkSenseா Service The ParkSenseா Rear Park Assist SystemParkSense௡ can be enabled and disabled using the When the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system is mal-Uconnect௡ System. The available choices are: Off, Sound functioning, the Electronic Vehicle Information CenterOnly, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Set- (EVIC) will actuate a single chime, once per ignitiontings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for cycle, and it will display the “WIPE OFF REAR PARKfurther information. ASSIST SENSORS”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS” 3 or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer toWhen the ParkSense௡ soft-key is pressed to disable the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and theRefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” system has detected a fault condition, the EVIC willin “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further display the “WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS”,information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICEand the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approxi- vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense௡mately five seconds. will not operate.
    • 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIf “WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or “SERVICEin the EVIC make sure the outer surface and the under- PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see anside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, authorized dealer.ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle theignition. If the message continues to appear, see anauthorized dealer. Service Park Assist Sensors Wipe Off Rear Park Assist Sensors
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLEDЉ message. If “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLED” appears in the EVIC, cycle the ignition. If the message appears again, see an authorized dealer. 3 Service Park Assist SystemThe ParkSense Rear Park Assist system will be automati-cally disabled when there are faulted conditions outsideof the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system that inhibit thefeature from functioning properly. The Electronic Vehicle Park Assist System DisabledInformation Center (EVIC) will actuate a single chime,once per ignition cycle, and it will display the ЉPARK
    • 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECleaning The ParkSenseா System • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSEClean the ParkSense௡ sensors with water, car wash soap position and ParkSense௡ is turned off, the EVIC willand a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message forscratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam- approximately five seconds.age the sensors. • Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors regularly, taking careParkSenseா System Usage Precautions not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.NOTE: Failure to do so can result in the system not working• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the properly. The ParkSense௡ system might not detect an rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ system operating properly. bumper.• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., must affect the performance of ParkSense௡. not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/• When you turn ParkSense௡ off, the EVIC will display bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a turn ParkSense௡ off, it remains off until you turn it on sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST again, even if you cycle the ignition key. SENSORS” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 CAUTION! WARNING!• ParkSense௡ is only a parking aid and it is unable • Drivers must be careful when backing up even to recognize every obstacle, including small ob- when using the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist sys- stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de- tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes- 3 above or below the sensors will not be detected trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and when they are in close proximity. blind spots before backing up. You are responsible• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using for safety and must continue to pay attention to ParkSense௡ in order to be able to stop in time your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended serious injury or death. that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when (Continued) using ParkSense௡.
    • 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE PARKVIEWா REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF WARNING! (Continued) EQUIPPED• Before using the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ Rear system, it is strongly recommended that the ball Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will rear fascia when the warning display turns on the disappear. The ParkView௡ camera is located on the rear first flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. of the vehicle above the rear License plate. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen behind the vehicle. appears again.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of theof the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a vehicle. The following table shows the approximatehitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate distances for each zone: Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicleRed 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) 3Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater) WARNING! CAUTION! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView௡ should only using the ParkView௡ Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView௡ camera is check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- drive path. structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are (Continued) responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
    • 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Turning ParkViewா On Or Off — With Touch CAUTION! (Continued) Screen Radio • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView௡ to be able to 1. Turn the Radio on. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom- 2. Press the “More” soft-key. mended that the driver look frequently over his/ her shoulder when using ParkView௡.NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substancebuilds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse withwater, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2513. Press the “Settings” soft-key.4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview௡Backup Camera” to enable/disable.OVERHEAD CONSOLE 3The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lightsand storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage DoorOpener (HomeLink௡) and power sunroof switches mayalso be included, if equipped. Overhead Console
    • 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFront Map/Reading Lights The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lightsLights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKEcan be turned on by pressing the lens. is pressed.To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time. Sunglass Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart- ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to close. Front Map/Reading Lights
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 The HomeLink௡ buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ- ent HomeLink௡ channels. The HomeLink௡ indicator is located above the center button. 3 Sunglass Bin DoorGARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDHomeLink௡ replaces up to three hand-held transmittersthat operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink௡ Buttons/Overhead ConsolesHomeLink௡ unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Voltbattery.
    • 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink௡ system. Erase all channels before you begin programming. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink௡ buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes. NOTE: HomeLink௡ Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner • Erasing all channels should only be performed whenNOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- programming HomeLink௡ for the first time. Do notrity Alarm is active. erase channels when programming additional buttons.Before You Begin Programming HomeLinkா • If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleaseBe sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atbefore you begin programming. www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255Programming A Rolling CodeFor programming garage door openers that were manu-factured after 1995. These garage door openers can beidentified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button locatedwhere the hanging antenna is attached to the garage dooropener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 3open and close the door. The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view.
    • 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink௡ NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the nextbutton you want to program and the hand-held transmit- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.ter button. 6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two sec-cator light. The Homelink௡ indicator will flash slowly onds each time). If the garage door opener/device acti-and then rapidly after Homelink௡ has received the fre- vates, programming is complete.quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does notboth buttons after the indicator light changes from slow activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) toto rapid. complete the training.5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons,locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOTusually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmlypress and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ ButtonOn some garage door openers/devices there may be a To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is follow these steps:in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2572. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not cator light. The Homelink௡ indicator will flash slowlyrelease the button. and then rapidly after Homelink௡ has received the fre- quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- both buttons after the indicator light changes from slowming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining to rapid. 3steps. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ buttonProgramming A Non-Rolling Code and observe the indicator light.For programming Garage Door Openers manufacturedbefore 1995. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- ming is complete and the garage door/device1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. should activate when the HomeLink௡ button is2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) pressed.away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons,while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view. repeat each step for each remaining button. DO3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink௡ NOT erase the channels.button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-ter button.
    • 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEReprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to thisTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed tofollow these steps: time-out in the same manner.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until door or gate motor.the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do notrelease the button. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to programing steps. while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view.Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink௡ button,For programming transmitters in Canada/United States while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-heldthat require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink௡ hasseveral seconds of transmission. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fullyCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- trained.nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink௡
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2594. Watch for the HomeLink௡ indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Buttonrates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door follow these steps:may open and close while you are programming. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until 3and observe the indicator light. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- release the button. ming is complete and the garage door/device 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/ should activate when the HomeLink௡ button is Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all pressed. remaining steps. • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons, Using HomeLinkா repeat each step for each remaining button. DO To operate, press and release the programmed NOT erase the channels. HomeLink௡ button. Activation will now occur for theIf you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-programming, plug it back in at this time. tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
    • 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESecurity Troubleshooting TipsIt is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, herein your vehicle. are some of the most common solutions:To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Openerchannels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be to complete the training for a Rolling Code.erased. • Did you unplug the device for programming andThe HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled when remember to plug it back in?the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 General Information WARNING! This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry• Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following while you are programming the universal transceiver. two conditions: Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only 3 use this transceiver with a garage door opener that 2. This device must accept any interference that may be has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by received including interference that may cause undesired Federal safety standards. This includes most garage operation. door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not NOTE: use a garage door opener without these safety fea- • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or expressly approved by the party responsible for com- assistance. pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- device. ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause • The term IC before the certification/registration num- serious injury or death. ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
    • 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPOWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!The power sunroof switch is located between the sunvisors on the overhead console. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particu- larly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. Power Sunroof Switch (Continued)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially WARNING! (Continued) opened condition until the switch is pushed and held • Do not allow small children to operate the sun- rearward again. roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Closing Sunroof — Express Injury may result. Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any 3Opening Sunroof — Express position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Expresssecond and the sunroof will open automatically from any Close operation, any movement of the switch will stopposition. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati- the sunroof.cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual ModeOpen operation, any movement of the sunroof switch To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in thewill stop the sunroof. forward position. Any release of the switch will stop theOpening Sunroof — Manual Mode movement and the sunroof will remain in a partiallyTo open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and heldto full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
    • 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPinch Protect Feature Sunshade OperationThis feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of The sunshade can be opened manually. However, thethe sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re- NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof istract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press open.the switch forward and release to Express Close. Wind BuffetingNOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- Wind buffeting can be described as the perception ofsult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in thewill be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with thedisabled. windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certainVenting Sunroof — Express open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withopen to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, the rear windows open, open the front and rear windowsand will occur regardless of sunroof position. During together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occursExpress Vent operation, any movement of the switch will with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening tostop the sunroof. minimize the buffeting or open any window.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265Sunroof Maintenance NOTE:Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the powerthe glass panel. sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi- mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turnedIgnition OFF Operation to the LOCK position. Opening either front door willFor vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle cancel this feature. 3Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch • The Ignition Off time is programmable using thewill remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch Uconnect௡ System. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” inis turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherdoor will cancel this feature. information.
    • 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPEDThe 12 Volt (13 Amp) instrument panel power outlet islocated on the lower instrument panel, below the climatecontrols. The power outlet has power available when theignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. Thepower outlet will also operate a conventional cigarlighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’sPackage). Instrument Panel Outlet NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR௡ cigar knob and element must be used.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. 3 • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Center Console OutletThere is also a 12 volt power outlet located in the centerconsole. This power outlet has power available onlywhen the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
    • 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Underhood Fuses (Power Outlet Fuses)1— F84 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter2— F30 Fuse 20 A Yellow Center Console Outlet
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw • After the use of high power draw accessories, or power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in long periods of the vehicle not being started (with use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. 3 discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces- vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the battery even more quickly. Only use these inter- power outlet can cause damage. mittently and with greater caution. (Continued)
    • 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECUPHOLDERS Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped On some vehicles the front cupholders are equipped withFront Seat Cupholders a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the frontThe cupholders are located in the center console forward passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmerof the armrest between the front seats. Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea- tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Front Cupholders Light Ring In Front Cupholder
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271Rear Seat CupholdersThe rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrestbetween the rear seats. The cupholders are positionedforward in the armrest and side-by-side to provideconvenient access to beverage cans or bottles whilemaintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el- 3bows. Rear Seat Cupholders
    • 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESTORAGEGlovebox StorageThe glovebox storage compartment is located on thepassenger side of the instrument panel. Pull on therelease handle to open the glovebox storage compart-ment. Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Glovebox Storage Compartment
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273Console Features Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front ofAn open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the the armrest, to open the storage compartment.center console forward of the shift lever. WARNING!There is a storage compartment located under the centerconsole armrest. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet, Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-USB and Aux jack are located here. ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music 3 players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac- tion, resulting in death or injury. Center Console
    • 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDoor StorageThe door panels contain storage areas. Rear Door Trim Storage Front Door Trim Storage
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275Passenger Seat Storage — If EquippedSome models may be equipped with storage under thefront passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seattether to open the storage compartment. 3 Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment Passenger Seat Cushion Tether
    • 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLERear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped CARGO AREA FEATURESFor rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped witharmrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seatcompartment. The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu- ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor. NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use. Rear Armrest Storage
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 3 Rear Seatback Loops Folded Rear SeatbackAfter releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
    • 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into • To help protect against personal injury, passengers position. If the seatback is not securely locked into should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The position, the seat will not provide the proper rear cargo space is intended for load carrying stability for child seats and/or passengers. An purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. in seats and use seat belts.• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down WARNING! position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could The weight and position of cargo and passengers can be seriously injured in a collision. Children change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle should be seated and using the proper restraint handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per- system. sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: (Continued) • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. (Continued)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 Cargo Tie-Downs WARNING! (Continued) The rear cargo area is equipped with cargo tie-downs, • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear located on either side of the rear cargo area. axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of 3 the seatback. This could impair visibility or be- come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.Trunk Mat — If EquippedA trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. Thetrunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk frommud, snow, and debris. Cargo Tie-Downs
    • 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESki Pass-Through REAR WINDOW FEATURESThere is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear Rear Window Defrosterseat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis, The rear window defroster button is located on theto be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and climate control. Press this button to turn on thepull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (ifdoor. equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. For an additional 15 minutes of operation, press the button a second time. Ski Pass-Through
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 CAUTION!Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage tothe heating elements:• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on 3 the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCONTENTSⅥ Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 ▫ Four Button EVIC — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 313Ⅵ Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Ⅵ Uconnect௡ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 4Ⅵ Instrument Cluster — Premium Analog . . . . . . 288 ▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Ⅵ Instrument Cluster — Premium Digital . . . . . . 289 ▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Ⅵ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 290 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect௡ System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 333Ⅵ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Ⅵ Uconnect௡ 200 — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Siriusxm™ ▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 305 Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 ▫ Two Button EVIC — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 306 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 346
    • 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD Ⅵ iPod௡/USB/MP3 Control With Uconnect௡ And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 354 ▫ Connecting The iPod௡ Or External USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 ▫ Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 ▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 ▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . 356 ▫ Controlling The iPod௡ Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 ▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . 357 ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 ▫ Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 ▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 364Ⅵ CD Player — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Ⅵ Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 ▫ CD Player Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . 359 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285Ⅵ CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 ▫ Uconnect௡ 8.4 Climate Controls — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Ⅵ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 368 ▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Ⅵ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . 380 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 4
    • 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES1 — Air Demister 5 — Glove Compartment 9 — Trunk Release2 — Outlet 6 — Climate Control Hard Controls/ 10 — Hood Release3 — Instrument Cluster Uconnect௡ System Hard Controls 11 — Dimmer Control4 — Radio/Uconnect௡ System 7 — Power Outlet 12 — Headlight Switch 8 — Ignition Switch
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE 4
    • 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ANALOG
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM DIGITAL 4
    • 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System1. Tachometer (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale whenThis gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.(RPM x 1000). Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon asEquipped possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving Each tire, including the spare (if provided), on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to should be checked monthly when cold and overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also inflated to the inflation pressure recommended reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for properhas tires of a different size than the size indicated on the tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tovehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasdetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for those not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMStires.) low tire pressure telltale.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS CAUTION!malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the originalcombined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andsystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire sizeapproximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using re-quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size, 4When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causetem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can oras intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aof reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.
    • 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL3. Turn Signal Indicators CAUTION! The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge readsIf the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehiclemore than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a with the air conditioner turned off until the pointercontinuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the drops back into the normal range. If the pointersignals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,for a defective outside light bulb. turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-4. Temperature Gauge rized dealership for service.The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates thatthe engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed toexceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 system. If this light remains on after several ignition WARNING! cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see others could be badly burned by steam or boiling your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer- problem diagnosed and corrected. ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you NOTE: decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main- • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo- 4 Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. Light” in the instrument cluster will come on • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when the ignition switch is turned to the when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop ON/RUN position. It should go out with the when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuverengine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- that caused the ESC activation.dicator Light” comes on continuously with the enginerunning, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
    • 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL6. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information This indicator will illuminate when the front fog Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information. lights are on. 8. High Beam Indicator7. Engine Temperature Warning Light This indicator shows that the high beam head- This light warns of an overheated engine condi- lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward this indicator will illuminate and a single chime yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.will sound. 9. Seat Belt Reminder LightIf the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, RUN, this light will turn on for four to eightshift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, ifhicle. If the temperature reading does not return to the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seatservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder LightDo In Emergencies” for further information. will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi- ing Your Vehicle” for further information.cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 29510. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- This light monitors various brake functions, ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic including brake fluid level and parking brake system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is application. If the brake light turns on it may indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on indicate that the parking brake is applied, that when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder hasthe brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with dropped below a specified level.the anti-lock brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.If the light remains on when the parking brake has been 4 NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharpdisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, andhydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.In this case, the light will remain on until the conditionhas been corrected. If the problem is related to the brakebooster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brakeand a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
    • 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The light also will turn on when the parking brake is WARNING! applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is tion. dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF IndicatorVehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System Light — If Equipped(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the trol (ESC) is off.Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABSLight. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. 12. Fuel GaugeOperation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank whenturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off 13. Speedometerunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is Indicates vehicle speed.detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the lightinspected by an authorized dealer.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 29714. Power Steering System Warning when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain This light is used to manage the electrical on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). during starting, have the system checked by an autho- Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and rized dealer. Operating” for further information. 16. Air Bag Warning Light15. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds This light informs you of a problem with the as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on 4 problem is detected, the light will come on during starting, stays on, or turns on while while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition driving, have the system inspected at an authorizedkey when the vehicle has completely stopped and the dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” forshould turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine further information.running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, 17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equippedsee an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme- mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle securitydiate service is required and you may experience reduced alarm is arming, and then will flash slowlyperformance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and until the vehicle is disarmed.your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
    • 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL18. Fuel Door Reminder 22. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Center (EVIC) Display Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the Odometer Display vehicle. The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- hicle has been driven.19. Electronic Speed Control Set Light This light will turn on when the electronic U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of speed control has been set. vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair20. Low Fuel Light technician should leave the odometer reading the same When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must fuel is added. be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ This indicator will illuminate when the park service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or lights or headlights are turned on. that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engineEVIC display. It displays the gear position of the auto- speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that thematic transmission. charging system is experiencing a problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting fromPARK. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) DisplayThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- 24. Oil Pressure Warning Light 4tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The lightinstrument cluster. For further information, refer to should turn on momentarily when the engine is“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”. started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will23. Charging System Warning Light sound for four minutes when this light turns on. This light shows the status of the electrical charg- ing system. The light should turn on when the Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN and remain on This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
    • 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL25. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light 26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and monitors engine and automatic transmission con- may stay on for as long as four seconds. trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulbIf the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it does not come on when turning the key from OFF toindicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.is not functioning and that service is required. However,the conventional brake system will continue to operate Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., maynormally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of yourIf the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle willas soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock drive normally and will not require towing.brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when theignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, havethe light inspected by an authorized dealer.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If CAUTION! EquippedProlonged driving with the MIL on could cause This light indicates that the transmission fluiddamage to the engine control system. It also could temperature is running hot. This may occuraffect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If thisflashing, severe catalytic converter damage and light turns on while driving, safely pull overpower loss will soon occur. Immediate service is and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission intorequired. NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the 4 light turns off. WARNING! CAUTION!A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually causeoperating conditions. This can cause a fire if you severe transmission damage or transmission failure.drive slowly or park over flammable substances suchas dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could resultin death or serious injury to the driver, occupants orothers.
    • 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL This telltale will illuminate green when the elec- WARNING! tronic speed control is SET. For further informa- If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un- illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to 30. Amber Electronic Vehicle Information Center boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust (EVIC) Reconfigurable Telltales components and cause a fire. This area will show reconfigurable amber telltales (Low Fuel Telltale, Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator, Transmis-28. Selectable EVIC Information sion Temperature Warning Telltale). For further information,This area of the cluster will display selectable informa- refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc.). Forfurther information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- 31. Red Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped”. Reconfigurable Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales (Door(s)29. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Ajar, Oil Pressure Warning Telltale, Charging System This telltale will illuminate amber when the Telltale, Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale, Engine electronic speed control is ON. For further Temperature Warning Telltale, Electric Power Steering information, refer to “Electronic Speed Con- Malfunction). For further information, refer to “Elec- trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.Vehicle.”
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 30332. ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If EquippedThe ECO indicator will illuminate when you are drivingin a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modifydriving habits in order to increase fuel economy. TheECO display will toggle on and off depending on drivinghabits and vehicle usage.ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER(EVIC) 4The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-tures a driver-interactive display that is located in theinstrument cluster. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 1 — EVIC Steering Wheel Controls 2 — EVIC Display The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The main display area also displays Љpop upЉ
    • 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELmessages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- • Unstored Messagesing or information messages. These pop up messages fall This message type is displayed indefinitely or until theinto several categories: condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are ЉTurn Signal OnЉ (if a turn signal• Five Second Stored Messages is left on) and ЉLights OnЉ (if driver leaves the vehicle).When the appropriate conditions occur, this type ofmessage takes control of the main display area for • Unstored Messages Until RUNfive seconds and then returns to the previous screen. These messages deal primarily with the Remote StartMost of the messages of this type are then stored (as long feature. This message type is displayed until the ignitionas the condition that activated it remains active) and can is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type arebe reviewed from the ЉMessagesЉ main menu item. As ЉRemote Start Aborted - Door AjarЉ and ЉPress Brakelong as there is a stored message, an ЉiЉ will be displayed Pedal and Push Button to StartЉ.in the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of • Five Second Unstored Messagesthis message type are ЉRight Front Turn Signal Lamp When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of messageOutЉ and ЉLow Tire PressureЉ. takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this message type is ЉAutomatic High Beams OnЉ.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305Engine Oil Change Indicator System Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™Oil Change Required 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINEYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message RUN position (Do not start the engine.)will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timesonds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the within 10 seconds.next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil changeindicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE 4engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent START/STOP button once to return the ignition to theupon your personal driving style. OFF/LOCK position.Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Doposition or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if not start the engine.)equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off themessage temporarily, press and release the MENU but- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timeston. To reset the oil change indicator system (after within 10 seconds.performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.lowing procedure.
    • 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Fuel Economy Infostart the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not • Cruise Control Inforeset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. • Stored MessagesTwo Button EVIC — If EquippedThis system allows the driver to select a variety of useful • Tire Pressureinformation by pressing the switches mounted on the • Settingssteering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following: • Units• Odometer • Language• Digital Vehicle Speed• Trip Info• Range To Empty
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307The system allows the driver to select information by UP Arrow Buttonpressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP arrow button to scrollwheel: upward through the main menus (Odometer, Digital Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Range To Empty, Average Fuel Economy, Current Fuel Economy, Stored Messages, Settings). RIGHT Arrow Button Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to 4 access the sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Messages EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Two–Button EVIC Controls) • Key Fob Battery Low • Wrong Key Fob • Key Fob Damaged
    • 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Key In Ignition • Washer Fluid Low• Left Turn Signal Out • Parking Brake Engaged• Right Turn Signal Out • Brake Fluid Low• Turn Signal On • Service Electronic Braking System• Lights On • Engine Temperature Hot• Low Beam Headlight Out • Battery Voltage Low• High Beam Headlight Out • Oil Pressure Low• License Plate Light Out • Fuel Low• Backup Light Out • Service Antilock Brake System• Brake Light Out • Service Electronic Throttle Control• Parking Light Out • Transmission Too Hot• Service Airbag System • Service Power Steering• Service Airbag Warning Light • Oil Temperature Hot
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309• Check Fuel Cap • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled• Oil Change Due • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled• Service Tire Pressure System • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled• Inflate Tire to XX • Door Open• Coolant Low • Doors Open• Rain Sensor Fail • Trunk open 4 • Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low• Traction Control Off • Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset• Engine Warming Wait To Start • Remote Start Active Key To Run• Too Cold Plug In Heater • Remote Start Aborted Door Open• Cruise Off • Remote Start Aborted Hood Open• Cruise Ready • Remote Start Aborted Time Expired• Cruise Set To XXX MPH • Remote Start Aborted Too Cold• Cruise Set To XXX km/h • Remote Start Active Push Start Button
    • 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELEVIC Main Menu • SettingsTo step to each main menu feature press and release the • UnitsUP button once for each step. A step from the last item inthe list will cause the first item in the feature list to be • Languagedisplayed. The following features are in the Main menu: NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset• Odometer (Average Fuel Economy), the EVIC prompts a reset with a RIGHT arrow button graphic and the word RESET next• Outside Temperature Display to it.• Digital Vehicle Speed Trip Info• Trip Info Press and release the UP arrow button until the Trip Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the• Range To Empty RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip• Fuel Economy Info features in the next screen:• Cruise Control Info • Trip A• Stored Messages • Trip B• Tire Pressure • Elapsed Time
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311Press the UP buttons to cycle through all the Trip Resetting A Trip Info FunctionComputer functions. To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the function you want to reset using the UP button. Push theThe Trip Functions mode displays the following RIGHT arrow button until the feature displays zero.information: Range To Empty (RTE)Trip A Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled withShows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance isreset. determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous 4Trip B and average fuel economy, according to the current fuelShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last tank level. RTE cannot be reset.reset. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicleElapsed Time loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance ofShows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. the vehicle, regardless of the RTE display value.Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)ON or START position. estimated driving distance, the RTE display will change to a text display of ЉLOW FUEL”. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
    • 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELsignificant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:LOW FUEL text and a new RTE value will display. • If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle graphic isAverage Fuel Economy displayed with tire pressure values in each corner orShows the average fuel economy since the last reset. the graphic.Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and • If one or more tires have low pressure, Inflate Tire Toholding the RIGHT arrow button (as prompted in the XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tireEVIC display). Upon reset, the history information will pressure values in each corner of the graphic. Tirebe erased, and the averaging will continue from the last pressure values that are too low will be flashing.fuel average reading before the reset. • If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ЉServiceCurrent Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per TPM SystemЉ is displayed. Tire Pressure is an infor-100 Kilometers (L/100km) mation only function and cannot be reset.This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graphform while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in Stored Messagesreal-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving When a stored warning message is present, thishabits in order to increase fuel economy. icon is displayed in the lower left side of the Tire Pressure menu. This feature shows theTire PSIPress and release the UP button until ЉTire PressureЉ isdisplayed.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313number of stored warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT Four Button EVIC — If Equippedarrow button will allow you to see what the stored This system allows the driver to select a variety of usefulmessages are. information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:Settings — EVIC Units And Language SelectionDisplays the units used for the Outside Temperature, • Radio InfoAverage and Current Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty • Fuel Economy Infoand Tire Pressure features. Press and Release the RIGHTarrow button to toggle units between ЉU.S.Љ and ЉMET- • Screen Setup 4RICЉ. • Digital Vehicle SpeedPress the UP arrow button until the Language is dis- • Analog Vehicle Speedplayed, then press the Right arrow button to selectEnglish, Francais, or Espanol depending on availability. • Trip Info • Tire Pressure • Vehicle Info • Stored Warning Messages
    • 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELThe system allows the driver to select information by UP Arrow Buttonpressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP arrow button to scrollwheel: upward through the main menu and sub- menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up). DOWN Arrow Button Press and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up). RIGHT Arrow Button Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the information screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Press and hold EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Four–Button EVIC the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to Controls) reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315LEFT Arrow Button Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu from an info screen or sub-menu item.Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)DisplaysThe EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the 4cluster and consists of the follow sections:
    • 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG) 4. Menu Titles / Odometer 5. Menu Set (Selectable Icons) 6. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL) 7. Reconfigurable Telltales 8. Audio / Phone Information 9. Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menus1. Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph) is shown here.2. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for Messagesnon critical warnings, red for critical warnings and white • Front Seatbelts Unbuckledfor on demand information. • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled • Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to XX”• Service Airbag System • Service Tire Pressure System• Traction Control Off • Parking Brake Engaged• Washer Fluid Low • Brake Fluid Low• Oil Pressure Low • Service Electronic Braking System• Oil Change Due • Engine Temperature Hot 4• Fuel Low • Battery Voltage Low• Service Antilock Brake System • Service Electronic Throttle Control• Service Electronic Throttle Control • Lights On• Service Power Steering • Right Turn Signal Light Out• Cruise Off • Left Turn Signal Light Out• Cruise Ready • Turn Signal On• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
    • 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Vehicle Not in Park • Service Airbag Warning Light• Key in Ignition • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled• Key in Ignition Lights On • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled• Remote Start Active Key to Run • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled• Remote Start Active Push Start Button • Door Open• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low • Doors Open• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold • Trunk Open• Remote Start Aborted Door Open • Gear Not Available• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open • Shift Not Allowed• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open • Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired • Autostick Unavailable Service Required• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset • Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.• Service Airbag System • Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive tales. These telltales include:• Service Transmission • Low Fuel Telltale• Service Shifter When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling fuel is added.• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On 4 • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator• Washer Fluid Low This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind- shield washer fluid is low.The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into thewhite telltales area on the right, amber telltales in themiddle, and red telltales on the left. • Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale – If Equipped This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
    • 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELIf this telltale turns on, safely pull over and stop the EVIC Red Telltalesvehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. Theserun the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off. telltales include: • Door Ajar CAUTION! This telltale turns on when one or more doors Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually ajar. cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. • Oil Pressure Warning Telltale This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle WARNING! and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is sound when this light turns on. illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. components and cause a fire.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321• Charging System Telltale If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on while This telltale shows the status of the electrical the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever ison while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non- placed in the PARK position. The telltale should turn off.essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, youridle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the telltalecharging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service 4an authorized dealer. is required. You may experience reduced performance, anIf jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle mayProcedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. require towing.• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale • Engine Temperature Warning Telltale This telltale informs you of a problem with the This telltale warns of an overheated engine condi- Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- telltale comes on while driving, have the sys- proaches H, this telltale will illuminate and a tem checked by an authorized dealer. single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
    • 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELIf the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over and EVIC Green Telltalesstop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, • Electronic Speed Control SETshift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- This telltale will illuminate green when the elec-hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to tronic speed control is SET. For further informa-normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”Do In Emergencies” for more information. Full Speedometer Analog Or Digital Display• Electric Power Steering Malfunction Selection This telltale is on when the Electric Power Full Speedometer Analog Icon Steering is not operating and needs service.EVIC White Telltales Full Speedometer Digital Icon• Electronic Speed Control ON This telltale will illuminate amber when the electronic speed control is ON. For further infor- mation, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)the Analog or Digital display icon is highlighted in the Press and release the UP or DOWN arrowEVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlightedchange the display between analog and digital. in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis-Vehicle Speed MPH / Km/h played. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow through the following information sub-menus: button until the Vehicle Speed icon is high- lighted in the EVIC. Press the RIGHT arrow Tire Pressure 4 button to view a digital display of the current Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button untilspeed in MPH or km/h. Pressing the RIGHT arrow ЉTire PressureЉ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press andbutton a second time will toggle the unit of measure release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the followingbetween mph or km/h. Press the LEFT arrow button to will be displayed:return to the main menu. • If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON isNOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle displayed with tire pressure values in each corner ofSpeed menu will not change the unit of measure in the the ICON.EVIC. • If one or more tires have low pressure, ЉInflate Tire To XXЉ is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
    • 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value.• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, ЉService Tire Pressure SystemЉ is displayed. Tire Pressure Digital Display Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu. Tire Pressure Analog Display
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”under “Starting and Operating” for further information.Coolant TemperaturePress and release the UP or DOWN arrow button untilЉCoolant TemperatureЉ is highlighted in the EVIC. Pressand release the RIGHT arrow button and the coolanttemperature will be displayed. 4Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is high- lighted. Press the RIGHT arrow button and the next screen will display the following: Fuel Economy Analog Display• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar- graph)• Range To Empty (RTE)• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
    • 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Fuel Economy Digital Display Fuel Economy MPG Flower Analog DisplayThe EVIC has the capability of displaying an interactiveflower through the Fuel Economy sub-menu which willadd one flower pedal for every 2.5 Miles Per Gallon(MPG) increment. Once the vehicle reached 30 MPG theEVIC will display a full flower.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average read- ing before the reset. Range To Empty (RTE) Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel 4 tank level. RTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow button. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Fuel Economy MPG Flower Digital Display loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance ofAverage Fuel Economy — If Equipped the vehicle, regardless of the RTE displayed value.This feature shows the average fuel economy since the When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)last reset. When Average Fuel Economy is selected, The estimated driving distance, the RTE display will changeword ЉRESET>Љ (with right arrow) appears next to it. to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continuePressing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significantEconomy which displays Љ0Љ immediately after reset. amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
    • 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELFUEL” message and a new RTE value will display. Pressthe LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu.Miles Per Gallon (MPG)The Miles Per Gallon (MPG) feature displays instanta-neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the RTE, thisfunction cannot be reset. Press the LEFT arrow button toreturn to the main menu.Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip fea- Trip Info Analog Displaytures in the next screen:• Trip A• Trip B• Elapsed Time
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 The Trip Functions mode displays the following information: Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset. Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last 4 reset. Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Trip Info Digital Display Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON or START position.Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all theTrip Computer functions or press the LEFT arrow button Resetting A Trip Info Functionto return to the main menu. To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN buttons. Press the RIGHT arrow button until the feature displays zero.
    • 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELStored Messages Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Screen Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows button until the Messages display icon is high- you to change what information is displayed in the lighted in the EVIC. This feature shows the instrument cluster as well as the location that information number of stored warning messages. Pressing is displayed.the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button untilstored messages are. Press the LEFT arrow button to the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC.return to the Main Menu. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter theScreen Setup Screen Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows Screen Setup Display Analog Icon you to change the location that information is displayed within the instrument cluster. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to highlight a screen setup location (i.e., Upper Left, Upper Right, etc.) then press the RIGHT arrow Screen Setup Display Digital Icon button to select the location and make changes. Press the UP and DOWN buttons to select the information you would like to display in that location (i.e., Date, Time, Outside Temp, etc.) and press the RIGHT arrow button toPress and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until save the display setting. You can press the LEFT arrowthe Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC. button at any time to back out of a sub-menu selection.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331NOTE: The Screen Setup items are only available at Gear Displayspeeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). All other menu items • Standard (PRND –/+) (default setting)are not active when in Screen Setup. If the vehicle isshifted into gear, this feature is locked out and the main • Single Character (D)screen will display “Screen Setup Unavailable While In • Word (Drive)Motion”. Upper LeftScreen Setup Driver Selectable Items • None 4Speedometer • Compass• Analog 1 • Outside Temp (default setting)• Analog 2 • Time• Digital 1 (default setting) • Range To Empty (RTE)• Digital 2 • Average MPG
    • 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Current MPG Lower Left• Trip A • None (default setting)• Trip B • CompassUpper Right • Outside Temp• None • Time• Compass (default setting) Lower Right• Outside Temp • None (default setting)• Time • Compass• Range To Empty (RTE) • Outside Temp• Average MPG • Time• Current MPG• Trip A• Trip B
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of theSettings) control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).• Cancel Soft-Keys• Okay Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect௡ display.Uconnectா SETTINGS Customer Programmable Features — UconnectாThe Uconnect௡ system uses a combination of soft andhard keys located on the center of the instrument panel System 8.4 Settings 4 Press the More soft-key, then press the Settings soft-keythat allows you to access and change the customer to display the menu setting screen. In this mode theprogrammable features. Uconnect௡ system allows you to access programmableHard-Keys features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect௡ system in Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-Onthe center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, CompassScroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at aTurn the control knob to scroll through menus and time.
    • 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELWhen making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the • Display Modedesired mode. Once in the desired mode press and When in this display you may select one of the autorelease the preferred setting until a check-mark appears display settings. To change Mode status, touch andnext to the setting, showing that setting has been se- release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch thelected. arrow back soft-key.Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow • Display Brightness With Headlights ONsoft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X When in this display, you may select the brightness withsoft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scalescreen will allow you to toggle up or down through the between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backavailable settings. soft-key.Display • Display Brightness With Headlights OFFAfter pressing the Display soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may select the brightness withwill be available. the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335• Set Language Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until aWhen in this display, you may select one of three check-mark appears next to the setting, showing thatlanguages for all display nomenclature, including the trip setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyfunctions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch to return to the previous menu.the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired • Touchscreen Beeplanguage soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the When in this display, you may turn on or shut off thelanguage, showing that setting has been selected. Touch sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) isthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a 4• Units check-mark appears next to the setting, showing thatWhen in this display, you may select to have the EVIC, setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyodometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed to return to the previous menu.between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In ClusterMetric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directionsshowing that setting has been selected. Touch the back will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches aarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. designated turn within a programmed route. To make• Voice Response Length your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn InWhen in this display, you may change the Voice Re- Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to thesponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
    • 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELClock • Set Time MinutesAfter pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. Thewill be available. Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust• Sync Time With GPS the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-keyWhen in this display, you may automatically have the to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key toradio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch close out of the settings screen.the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-markappears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Time Formatselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the When in this display, you may select the time formatprevious menu. display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,• Set Time Hours showing that setting has been selected. Touch the backWhen in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To makeyour selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust thehours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key toclose out of the settings screen.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337• Show Time In Status Bar soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist” inWhen in this display, you may turn on or shut off the “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time tem function and operating information.Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key • Blind Spot Alertuntil a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert featuresetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blindto return to the previous menu. Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.Safety / Assistance When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor 4After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol- (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visuallowing settings will be available. alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will• Park Assist show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as anThe Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” isthe vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE- selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch theSound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park arrow back soft-key.Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only orSounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
    • 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in • Rain Sensing Auto Wipersthe area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is When this feature is selected, the system will automati-not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moistureTake your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor on the windshield. To make your selection, touch thealignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next toin the BSM not operating to specification. setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the• ParkView௡ Backup Camera back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ Rear LightsBack Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settingsimage of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever will be available.the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will bedisplayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a • Headlight Illumination On Approachcaution note to “check entire surroundings” across the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activatetop of the screen. After five seconds, this note will and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doorsdisappear. The ParkView௡ camera is located on the rear are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,selection, touch the ParkView௡ Backup Camera soft-key, touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired timeuntil a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to thesetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key previous menu.to return to the previous menu.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped • Daytime Running LightsWhen this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn onin the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until aThe headlights will also turn off when the wipers are check-mark appears next to setting, showing that settingturned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toyour selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft- return to the previous menu.key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showingthat setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow • Flash Headlights With Lock 4soft-key to return to the previous menu. When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may beWhen this feature is selected, the high beam headlights selected with or without the sound horn on lock featurewill deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head-make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams soft- lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appearskey, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previoussoft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ menu.SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
    • 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELDoors & Locks a check-mark appears next to setting, showing thatAfter pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keysettings will be available. to return to the previous menu.• Auto Unlock On Exit • Sound Horn With LockWhen this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when When this feature is selected, the horn will sound whenthe vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the the remote start is activated. To make your selection,PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check-opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock mark appears next to setting, showing that setting hasOn Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return tosetting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the the previous menu.back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. • Sound Horn With Remote Start• Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected, the horn will sound whenWhen this feature is selected, the front and headlights the remote start is activated. To make your selection,will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your check-mark appears next to setting, showing that settingselection, touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks If driver door first is selected, once the driver door isWhen 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be useddriver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When • Passive Entry1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’sthe RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the door(s) without having to press the Remote Keylesspassenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To makeis selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a 4of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. check-mark appears next to setting, showing that settingNOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toFob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Startdriver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Startgrasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob soft-key the following settings will be available.Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more thanonce will only result in the driver’s door opening.
    • 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Horn With Remote Start Engine Off OptionsWhen this feature is selected, the horn will sound when After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-the remote start is activated. To make your selection, lowing settings will be available.touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a • Engine Off Power Delaycheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting When this feature is selected, the power windowhas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to switches, radio, Uconnect௡ phone system (if equipped),return to the previous menu. DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to Vehicle Start — If Equipped 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. OpeningWhen this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and either front door will cancel this feature. To change theheated steering wheel will automatically turn on when Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds,temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). To make your 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touchselection, touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key, until a the arrow back soft-key.check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting • Headlight Off Delayhas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to When this feature is selected, the driver can choose toreturn to the previous menu. have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top ofdesired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,return to the previous menu. Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with theCompass Settings compass sensor, and it may give false readings.After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-ing settings will be available.• Variance 4Compass Variance is the difference between MagneticNorth and Geographic North. To compensate for thedifferences the variance should be set for the zone wherethe vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properlyset, the compass will automatically compensate for thedifferences, and provide the most accurate compassheading. Compass Variance Map
    • 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Perform Compass Calibration • EqualizerTouch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid andcompass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scalecompass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backCAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also soft-key.calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide yourcompleting one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free finger up or down to change the setting as well as touchfrom large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL directly on the desired setting.indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compasswill now function normally. • Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative toAudio vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted VolumeAfter pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrowwill be available. back soft-key.• Balance/FadeWhen in this display you may adjust the Balance andFade settings.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345• Music Info Cleanup SiriusXM™ SetupThis feature helps organize music files for optimized After pressing the SiriusXM™ Setup soft-key the follow-music navigation. To make your selection, touch the ing settings will be available.Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by • Channel Skippressing the arrow back soft-key. SiriusXM™ can be programmed to designate a group of• Surround Sound channels that are the most desirable to listen to or toThis feature provides simulated surround sound mode. exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To makeTo make your selection, touch the Surround Sound your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the 4soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow channels you would like to skip followed by pressing theback soft-key. arrow back soft-key.Phone/Bluetooth • Subscription InformationAfter pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow- New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a freeing settings will be available. limited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free• Paired Devices services, it will be necessary to access the information onThis feature shows which phones are paired to the the Subscription Information screen in order to re-Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer subscribe.to the Uconnect௡ Supplement.
    • 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELTouch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- Uconnectா 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITHscription Information screen. CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM™ RADIOWrite down the SiriusXM™ ID numbers for your re-ceiver. To reactivate your service, either call the numberlisted on the screen or visit the provider online.NOTE: SiriusXM™ Travel Link is a separate subscription. Uconnect௡ 200 Operating Instructions — Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) TIME ButtonPush the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the timeradio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency.time to turn off the radio. Clock Setting ProcedureElectronic Volume Control 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours areThe electronic volume control turns continuously highlighted.(360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turn-ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ 4the volume and to the left decreases it. SCROLL control knob.When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side ENTER/set at the same volume level as last played. BROWSE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will highlight.SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the SCROLL control knob.right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. 5. To exit, press the TIME button or press the BACKThe radio will remain tuned to the new station until you button to return to the previous menu.make another selection. Holding either button will by-pass stations without stopping until you release it.
    • 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELThe clock can also be set by pressing the MENU button. TUNE ControlFor vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwiseMENU button until CLOCK appears in the display. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.Using the ENTER/BROWSE button select SET TIME, Setting The Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance Orand then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. FadeNOTE: Time format has the options of 12HR or 24HR. To set the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or FadeSelecting one of these options will change the way the settings press the AUDIO button to access the Audioclock is displayed. sub-menu.INFO Button The Audio sub-menu can also be reached by pressing thePress the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call MENU button until AUDIO appears in the display. Pressletters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text the ENTER/BROWSE button to select the AUDIO menumessage broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). and use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight select Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade. Once theRW/FF desired selection is highlighted, press the ENTER/Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons BROWSE button to select the item and use the TUNE/causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the SCROLL knob to adjust the setting.direction of the arrows. This feature operates in eitherAM or FM frequencies.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349Press the ENTER/BROWSE button and BASS will dis- Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a fifth time and FADEplay. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knobincrease or counterclockwise to decrease the bass tones. clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a second time andMID RANGE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Press the BACK button to exit Bass, Mid Range, Treble,control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to Balance or Fade.decrease the mid-range tones. MENU Button 4Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a third time and Pressing the MENU button allows you to scroll betweenTREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control the setting sub-menus. Once the desired sub-menu set-knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to de- ting is highlighted press the TUNE/SCROLL knob tocrease the treble tones. select the setting. The following items are selectable:Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a fourth time and Radio ModeBALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL con- • Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allowtrol knob clockwise or counterclockwise adjust the sound you to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance orlevel from the right or left side speakers. Fade, just like pressing the Audio hard control. If the BACK button is pressed the radio will return to the Main Menu.
    • 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the • Repeat (RPT) — When Repeat is activated, the cur- clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/ rently playing song will begin again when it ends. It SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press will continue to cycle through the same song until the ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The repeat is turned Off. Repeat will be turned off once one minutes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the for the following conditions are met: 1) The source is right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the ejected 2) A different track list within that source is ENTER/BROWSE button to save time change. initiated 3) The REPEAT button is toggled OFF. This will only appear in the menu if the device currentlyPlayer Mode playing can support these features.• Player Browse — Selecting Player Browse will go to • Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow the appropriate browse menu depending on the device you to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or currently playing (will function the same as pressing Fade, just like pressing the Audio hard control. If the the browse button while in that mode). This will only BACK button is pressed the radio will return to the appear in the menu if the device currently playing can Main Menu. support these features. • Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the• Shuffle (SHFL) — This function shuffles (randomizes clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/ the order of the files). This will only appear in the SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press menu if the device currently playing can support these the ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. features.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 The minutes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using To Set The Pushbutton Memory the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the When you are receiving a station that you wish to ENTER/BROWSE button to save time change. commit to pushbutton memory, press and hold the button (1–5) you wish to lock onto this station forSystem Info 3 seconds.• Selecting System Info will display the software ver- You may add a second or third station to each pushbut- sion, serial number and SIRIUS ID. ton by repeating the above procedure with this exception:RADIO Button Press the A–B–C button to select the A, B or C mode. Each 4Press the button to select either AM, FM and Satellite button can be set for up to 3 stations in AM, FM and. Thismode if equipped. allows a total of 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.Buttons 1 - 5These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Player Buttoncommit to pushbutton memory AM (A, B, C), FM (A, B, Pressing the Player button will allow you to switch fromC) and Satellite — 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations. AM/FM modes to Player mode (CD, USB/iPOD, AUX, Bluetooth).
    • 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELOperation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and theMP3 Audio Play radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The displayNOTE: will show the track number, and index time in minutes• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. position to operate the radio.• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), CAUTION! recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and only. The use of other sized discs may damage the multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. CD player mechanism.Inserting Compact Disc(s) • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peelGently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD away and jam the player mechanism.label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into • Uconnect௡ 200 is a single CD player. Do notthe CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the attempt to insert a second CD if one is alreadyradio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than loaded.1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must beejected before a new disc can be loaded.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD TIME Button Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player willthe radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) buttonA disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. works in a similar manner. 4SEEK Button Shuffle (SHFL) And Repeat (RPT)Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the This feature plays the selections on the compact disc inCD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning random order to provide an interesting change of pace.of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the Press the MENU button to display the Player menu. Useprevious selection if the CD is within the first second of the TUNE/SCROLL knob to scroll to the Shuffle orthe current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Repeat sub-menu. Once the Shuffle or Repeat sub-menubutton will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in setting is highlighted press the ENTER/BROWSE buttonCD and MP3/WMA modes. to select the setting and turn it on or off.
    • 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELShuffle and Repeat cannot be active at the same time. If Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)one is selected while the other is currently active the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660currently active one will be changed to OFF. These Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.settings will be dependent of the current source. If shuffle When reading discs recorded using formats other thanis on in iPod௡, moving to CD will not have shuffle On ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to readunless it was previously set to On. files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-domly selected track. The radio uses the following limits for file systems:Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files • Maximum number of folder levels: 8The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of files: 255file recording media and formats are limited. Whenwriting MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of filetions. names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to displaySupported Media (Disc Types) the file name and folder name and will assign a numberThe MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are instead. With a maximum number of files, exceedingCDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA and CDDA+MP3. 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the • Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- following table are supported. In addition, variable bit character extension) rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files • Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or character extension) VBR bit rates.Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. MPEG Sampling Fre- Bit Rate (kbps)Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal Specification quency (kHz) 4CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). 320, 256, 224,Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, 48, 44.1, 32writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result inlonger disc loading times. 160, 128, 144, MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64, 24, 22.05, 16Supported MP3 File Formats Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension 16, 8as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 exten- ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album titlesion may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is notrecognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the supported by the radios.file.
    • 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPlaylist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommendedsupported. to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” optionPlayback of MP3/WMA Files before writing to the disc.When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, theradio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play)contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Pressing the Enter/Browse button will bring up a list oftime to start playing the MP3 files. all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Se-Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected lecting a folder by pressing the ENTER/BROWSE buttonby the following: will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain CD-R media playable files).• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer The folder list will time out after five seconds. to load than non-multisession discs INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play)• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through increase with more files and folders the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed • The AUX device must be turned on and the device’stimeЉ priority mode. volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUXPress and hold the INFO button for three seconds or audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volumemore and the radio will display song titles for each file. down and radio volume up.Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Busto return to Љelapsed timeЉ display. (USB)Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode The USB audio input which allows the user to plug in a flash 4The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows drive and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify thethe user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player source and play through the vehicle speakers.and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode toand play through the vehicle speakers. USB an iPod or external USB drive is connected.Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to Pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button while in USBauxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. mode will bring up a list of available categories withinNOTE: the USB. The categories will consist of: Playlists, Artist,• The head unit will have no control of the AUX device. Album, All Songs, and Genre. Browsing through the You can only control the volume on the head unit. No categories will function the same as iPod browse. USB information about the song will be displayed. will not have folder browsing.
    • 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELIf the USB connected does not have any audio files andthe user selects USB as the device to play audio the screenwill display, “No audio files on device” this messaged isto be displayed for all devices that do not have audio fileswhen connected and selected.SecurityIf this radio is installed in a vehicle that does not have amatching Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) an Secu-rity code will need to be entered by the dealer.CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPEDThe single disc CD player is located in the center console. CD PlayerNOTE:• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position before the CD player will operate.• The CD Player is part of the radio for the Media Center 200 (Sales Code RAE).
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359CD Player Operating Instructions Uconnect௡ — If Equipped If equipped with Uconnect௡ 8.4, refer to the Uconnect௡Loading 8.4 manual for further information.To insert disc into the player, follow the instructionsshown: iPodா/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnectா1. Gently insert the disc with the label facing the rear of VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPEDthe vehicle while the light below the loading slot is This feature allows an iPod௡ or external USB device to beilluminated. The disc will automatically be pulled into plugged into the USB port. 4the CD player. iPod௡ control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡2. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the and iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software versions maylight below the loading slot will turn off. not fully support the iPod௡ control features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates.EJECT (EJT) ButtonIf there is a disc in the CD player, press the EJT button If equipped with Uconnect௡ 8.4, refer to the Uconnect௡and the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc User’s Manual for further details on iPod௡, USB, andwithin 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. MP3 usage.
    • 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELConnecting The iPodா Or External USB DeviceUse the connection cable to connect an iPod௡ or externalUSB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector portwhich is located in the center console. Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port Cable Routing NOTE: The center console will have a position where the iPod௡ or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be routed may be located in the base of the center console on either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is Using This Featurenot available in the center console base, route the cable By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect toaway from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the USB port:lid to close without damaging the cable. • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s soundOnce the audio device is connected and synchronized to system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,the vehicle’s iPod௡/USB/MP3 control system (iPod௡ or etc.) information on the radio display.external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), • The audio device can be controlled using the radiothe audio device starts charging and is ready for use by buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod௡ contents. 4pressing radio switches, as described below. • The audio device battery charges when plugged intoNOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis- the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specificcharged, it may not communicate with the iPod௡/USB/ audio device).MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. Controlling The iPodா Or External USB DeviceLeaving the audio device connected to the iPod௡/USB/ Using Radio ButtonsMP3 control system may charge it to the required level. To get into the iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say ЉUSBЉ or ЉSwitch to USBЉ. Once in the iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
    • 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPlay Mode • Jump forward in the current track by pressing andWhen switched to iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode, the holding the FF >> button.iPod௡ or external USB device automatically starts Play • A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> willmode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radiofaceplate may be used to control the iPod௡ or external jump backward or forward respectively, for fiveUSB device and display data: seconds.• Use the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the • Use the << SEEK button during play mode to jump to next or previous track. the start of the current track. Pressing the SEEK >> button during play mode will jump to the next track in • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while the list, or press the VR button and say ЉNext or playing a track, skips to the next track or press the Previous TrackЉ. VR button and say ЉNext TrackЉ. • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) click, will jump to the previous track in the list or for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps press the VR button and say ЉPrevious TrackЉ to the next screen of data for that track. Once all • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio • Preset 1 – Playlists device mode to repeat the current playing track or • Preset 2 – Artists press the VR button and say ЉRepeat ONЉ or ЉRepeat OffЉ. • Preset 3 – Albums• Press the SHUFFLE button to play the selections on • Preset 4 – Genres the USB/iPod device in random order to provide an • Preset 5 – Podcasts interesting change of pace. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when it is playing the • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list 4 track, press the SHUFFLE button again. on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.List Or Browse ModeDuring Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described • To exit Browse mode without making a selection, pressbelow, will bring up Browse mode. List mode enables the same PRESET button again to go back to Playscrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the mode.audio device.• In Browse mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod௡ or external USB device.
    • 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Browse button: The Browse button will display the CAUTION! (Continued) top level menu of the iPod௡ or external USB device. Press and then turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob • Placing items on the iPod௡ or external USB device, to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the or connections to the iPod௡ or external USB device TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select. This will dis- in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device play the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, and/or to the connectors. then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod௡ or external USB device sub- WARNING! menu levels are available on this system. Do not plug in or remove the iPod௡ or external USB CAUTION! device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident. • Leaving the iPod௡ or external USB device (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the damage the device. Follow the device manufactur- Uconnect௡ phone system. er’s guidelines. (Continued)
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect௡To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on phone system to list audio devices.the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Next TrackStreaming Audio”. Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on thePlay Mode radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next musicWhen switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can track on your cellular phone.start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, butsome devices require the music to be initiated on the Previous Track 4 Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button ondevice first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect௡ the radio and say “Previous Track” to start at the begin-phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the ning of the current music track.Uconnect௡ phone system, but just one can be selectedand played. Browse Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only theSelecting Different Audio Device current song that is playing will display info.1. Press PHONE button to begin.2. After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, sayЉSetupЉ, then ЉSelect Audio DevicesЉ.
    • 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSTEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with aThe remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume andsurface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rockeraccess the switches. switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ CD/HDD/AUX, etc.). The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode. Radio Operation Remote Sound System Controls Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next (Back View Of Steering Wheel) listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCEwill tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the followinggrammed in the radio preset pushbutton. precautions:CD Player 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching thePressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,will go to the beginning of the current track, or to thebeginning of the previous track if it is within one second wiping from center to edge. 4after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- ing the disc.If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays thesecond track; three times, it will play the third, etc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.The center button on the left side rocker switch has nofunction for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.center button will select the next available CD in theplayer. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
    • 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- CLIMATE CONTROLSlar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective The air conditioning and heating system is designed tocoating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) make you comfortable in all types of weather. Thisoversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known system can be operated through either the Automaticgood disc before considering disc player service. Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect௡ 8.4 system display if equipped.RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONESUnder certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in When the Uconnect௡ 8.4 system is in different modesyour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and pas-your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top ofby relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is the display.not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance doesnot satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume beturned down or off during mobile phone operation whennot using Uconnect௡ (if equipped).
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If 1. Blower ControlEquipped Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forcedThe Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of through the ventilation system in any mode. The blowerouter rotary dials and inner push knobs. speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “O” (OFF) position. There are seven blower speeds. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) 4 position. 2. Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporar- ily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. Manual Temperature Control
    • 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make ing the mode control selection. the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK Extended use of this mode is not recommended. position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp 3. Temperature Control weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left the outside air position for maximum defogging. into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tempera-• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging tures, while rotating right into the red area indicates when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode warmer temperatures. control is set to panel or Bi-Level. NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems• Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If the lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- Recirculation button is pressed while in this mode, the denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula- LED indicator will flash several times then go out. tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray Recirculation will be disabled automatically is this from behind the radiator and through the condenser. mode is selected. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3714. Air Conditioning Control 5. Mode Control (Air Direction)Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of airwill illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is distribution. You can select either a primary mode asengaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend ofscale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right two of these modes. The closer the setting is to ainto the red area indicates warmer temperatures. particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive from that mode.NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engageuntil the engine has been running for about 10 seconds. • Panel 4 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument• MAX A/C panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculationbuttons at the same time. NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat• ECONOMY MODE passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turnOFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, • Bi-Levelmove the temperature control to the desired temperature Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.and select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
    • 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there • Front Defrostis a difference in temperature between the upper and Air is directed through the windshield and side windowlower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower andThis feature gives improved comfort during sunny but temperature settings for best windshield and side win-cool conditions. dow defrosting.• Floor NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Air is directed through the floor outlets with a Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air small amount flowing through the defrost and side Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-window demist outlets. midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.• Mix Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side 6. Electronic Rear Window Defrost window demist outlets. This setting works best in Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining tor in the button will illuminate when the rear windowcomfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an addi- tional 15 minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373NOTE: CAUTION! (Continued)• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- time. sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win- • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. dow defroster only when the engine is operating. CAUTION! 4 Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. (Continued)
    • 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELUconnectா 8.4 Climate Controls — If Equipped Soft-Keys Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect௡ 8.4 systemHard-Keys screen.The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect௡ 8.4screen, in the center of the instrument panel. Uconnect௡ 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Soft-Keys Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And 3. Blower ControlSoft-keys) Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven1. A/C Button blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will causePress and release to change the current Air Conditioning automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keysPerforming this function will cause the automatic opera- as follows:tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicatorwill turn off. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the 4 climate controls will not function during Remote Start2. Recirculation Button operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)Press and release to change the current setting, the position. Blower control should be left in the “ON”indicator illuminates when ON. position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle Hard-key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
    • 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSoft-key An indicator will illuminate when the rear windowUse the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting defroster is on. The rear window defroster automaticallyand the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. turns off after 10 minutes.Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bararea between the icons. CAUTION!4. Front Defrost Button Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage toPress and release to change the current airflow setting to the heating elements:Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea- • Use care when washing the inside of the rearture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onto switch into manual mode. The blower speed may the interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothincrease when Defrost mode is selected. If the front and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel todefrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the heating elements. Labels can be peeled offthe previous setting. after soaking with warm water.5. Rear Defrost Button • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-Press and release this button to turn on the rear window sive window cleaners on the interior surface of thedefroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3776. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button this function will cause the ATC to switch betweenProvides the passenger with independent temperature manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automaticcontrol. Push the button for warmer temperature set- Operation” for more information.tings. 10. Driver Temperature Control Down ButtonNOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Provides the driver with independent temperature con-automatically exit Sync. trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.7. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati- 4Provides the passenger with independent temperature cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at thecontrol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. same time.NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will 11. Driver Temperature Control Up Buttonautomatically exit Sync. Provides the driver with independent temperature con- trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.8. Climate Control OFF ButtonPress and release this button to turn the Climate Control NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-ON/OFF. cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.9. AUTO Operation ButtonAutomatically controls the interior cabin temperature byadjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
    • 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL12. Modes NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfortThe airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outletscomes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and warmer air from the floor outlets.demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are • Floor Modeas follows: Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of• Panel Mode air is directed through the defrost and side window Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. demister outlets. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to • Mix Modedirect the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets Air comes from the floor, defrost and side windowand outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side demist outlets. This mode works best in cold orto side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off snowy conditions.wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust theamount of airflow from these outlets. • Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist• Bi-Level Mode outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and settings for best windshield and side window defrosting floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed and defogging. When the defrost mode is selected, thethrough the defrost and side window demister outlets. blower level may increase.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 37913. SYNC NOTE:Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger • If your air conditioning performance seems lower thantemperature setting with the driver temperature setting. expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-Changing the passenger temperature setting while in cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation ofSync will automatically exit this feature. dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray fromClimate Control Functions behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric 4 front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to theA/C (Air Conditioning) condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operatorto manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning Recirculationsystem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, When outside air contains smoke, odors, orcool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C you may wish to recirculate interior air bybutton to turn off the air conditioning and manually pressing the Recirculation control button. Theadjust the blower and airflow mode settings. recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
    • 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may Automatic Operationlead to excessive window fogging. On systems with 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (9) on theManual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearingoperation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the systemthis mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tempera-while in this mode will cause the LED in the control ture hard or soft control buttons (6, 7, 10, 11). Once thebutton to blink and then turn off. desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instru- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it isment panel. not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system toSoft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect௡ 8.4 system function automatically.screen. NOTE: • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric The operator can also select the direction of the airflow units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C feature. Refer to the “Uconnect௡ 8.4 System Settings” operation and Recirculation control can also be manually in this section of the manual. selected in Manual operation.To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic Operating Tipsmode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section foron low until the engine warms up. The blower willincrease in speed and transition into Auto mode. suggested control settings for various weather condi- 4 tions.Manual Operation Summer OperationThe system allows for manual selection of blower speed, air The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehiclesdistribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control. must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolantThe blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by to provide proper corrosion protection and to protectadjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylenea fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.allows the front occupants to control the volume of air Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Yourcirculated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
    • 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELWinter Operation NOTE:Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for longis not recommended because it may cause window periods, as fogging may occur.fogging. • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-Vacation Storage cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce orAny time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air Outside Air Intakeconditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of thefresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leavesadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if theyof compressor damage when the system is started again. enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. InWindow Fogging Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush,Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed and snow.by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor A/C Air Filtermode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and The climate control system filters outside air containingprovide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totallya problem increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather. taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
    • STARTING AND OPERATINGCONTENTSⅥ Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 387 ▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 5 ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 388 Ⅵ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 391 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 388 Ⅵ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 392 ▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 ▫ Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –30°F Or Ϫ34°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 ▫ Extended Park Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Ⅵ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 394 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
    • 384 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 396 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission Ⅵ Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 (1.4L Turbo Engine Only — Ddct) . . . . . . . . . 397 Ⅵ Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Ⅵ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 422 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 423 (2.0L And 2.4L Engine Only — 6F24) . . . . . . 407 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 426Ⅵ AutoStick௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 ▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 426 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 ▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Ⅵ Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 430 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Ⅵ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Ⅵ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 385 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 438 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 439 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 440 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451Ⅵ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Ⅵ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Ⅵ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 446 Ⅵ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 455 5 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Ⅵ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 456 ▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 ▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 462 ▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 448 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 ▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Ⅵ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 ▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 449 ▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
    • 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 467 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Ⅵ Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 487Ⅵ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 487 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470Ⅵ Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 387STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! (Continued)Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust bothinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children, and do not WARNING! leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key operate power windows, other controls, or move fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Manual Transmission – If Equipped 5 • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake, dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- lever in NEUTRAL. dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is (Continued) pressed to the floor.
    • 388 STARTING AND OPERATING• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked, Normal Starting rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button the locking mechanism and then turn the key. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warmAutomatic Transmission – If Equipped engine is obtained without pumping or pressing theThe shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL accelerator pedal.position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakesbefore shifting to any driving gear. To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The systemout of PARK. takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicleKeyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after This feature allows the driver to operate 10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine the ignition switch with the push of a prior to the engine starting, press the button again. button, as long as the ENGINE START/ To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE STOP button is installed and the Remote START/STOP Button Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment. 1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 3893. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s FootSTOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRALspeed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine Position)will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to anthe ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUNbutton is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift and START. To change the ignition switch positionslever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP without starting the vehicle and use the accessoriesbutton is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will follow these steps.display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the 5PARK position, or it could roll. • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVICNOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),(engine not running) position and the transmission is inPARK, the system will automatically time out after • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the to change the ignition switch to the RUN positionOFF position. (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
    • 390 STARTING AND OPERATING• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time 3. If the engine fails to start within 25 seconds, turn the to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”). 60 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.Extreme Cold Weather (Below –30°F or Ϫ34°C)To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of If Engine Fails To Startan externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- If the engine fails to start after you have followed theable from your authorized dealer) is required for the 1.4L “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-Turbo and 2.4L engines and recommended for the 2.0L dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal allengine. the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excessExtended Park Starting fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition keyNOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the ve- in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal andhicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days. repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the batteryto ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position andrelease it when the engine starts.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 391 on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump WARNING! will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera- the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time. serious personal injury. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits CAUTION! quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a 5 crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. grounded, three-wire extension cord. Wait 60 seconds before trying again. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.After StartingThe idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine WARNING!warms up. Remember to disconnect the engine block heaterTurbocharger “Cool Down” – If Equipped cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 VoltThis vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool electrical cord could cause electrocution.the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
    • 392 STARTING AND OPERATINGMANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid WARNING! warms up. This is normal.You or others could be injured if you leave the Shiftingvehicle unattended without having the parking Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As youbrake fully applied. The parking brake should al- release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, You should always use first gear when starting from aespecially on an incline. standing position. Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds CAUTION! To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuelNever drive with your foot resting on the clutch economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listedpedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicleclutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded orabnormal wear on the clutch. pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 393Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) WARNING!Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a 1.4L, Accel. 15 (24) 24 34 47 56 2.0L (39) (55) (76) (90) slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their and grip, and the vehicle could skid. Cruise 10 (16) 19 27 37 41 2.4L (31) (43) (60) (66)Engines CAUTION!Downshifting When descending a hill, be very careful to downshiftMoving from a high gear down to a lower gear is one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine 5recommended to preserve brakes whe